Download Print this page

Canon iR C6800 Series Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for iR C6800 Series:

Portable manual (456 pages)

,

Service handbook (132 pages)

,

Circuit diagram (92 pages)

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Service Handbook

Service Manual

iR C6800 Series

iR C6800C

Apr 6 2004

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Chapters

Table of Contents

Troubleshooting

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the iR C6800 Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Canon iR C6800 Series

Page 1: Service Manual
Service Manual iR C6800 Series iR C6800C Apr 6 2004...
Page 3 When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 4 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 5 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 System Construction............................1 1 1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories ................1 1 1.1.2 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories ..............1 2 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ..................1 3 1.2 Product Specifications ............................1 4 1.2.1 Names of Parts .............................
Page 8 Contents 2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network......................2 35 2.3.1 Overview..............................2 35 2.3.2 Using the PING Utility ..........................2 35 2.3.3 Using a Remote Host Address ........................2 35 2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ........................... 2 36 2.4.1 Overview..............................2 36 2.4.2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable ..................
Page 9 Contents 4.5 Image Processing.............................. 4 17 4.5.1 Overview of the Flow of Image Data ......................4 17 4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Modules..................4 18 4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing ......................... 4 19 4.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks ..................4 20 4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing.......................
Page 10 Contents Chapter 6 Laser Exposure 6.1 Construction................................ 6 1 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions................... 6 1 6.1.2 Major Components ............................6 2 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ......................6 3 6.2 Basic Sequence ..............................6 4 6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation........................6 4 6.3 Various Control ..............................
Page 11 Contents 7.7.7 Controlling the Black Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism .............. 7 49 7.7.8 Black Toner Supply........................... 7 50 7.7.9 Controlling the Black Developing Bias..................... 7 52 7.8 Transfer Device ..............................7 53 7.8.1 Overview of the Transfer Assembly ......................7 53 7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias ........................
Page 12 Contents 7.11.34 ITB Cleaning Blade..........................7 242 7.11.35 ITB Scoop up Sheet ..........................7 249 7.11.36 Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator ..................7 254 7.11.37 Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator ....................7 260 7.11.38 Ptential Sensor Unit..........................7 261 7.11.39 ATR Sensor Unit ..........................7 268 7.11.40 Patch Image Sensor ..........................
Page 13 Contents 8.10 Delivery ................................8 49 8.10.1 Overview ..............................8 49 8.10.2 Face Up Delivery ............................ 8 49 8.10.3 Face Down Delivery ..........................8 50 8.11 Parts Replacement Procedure ......................... 8 53 8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Unit ..........................8 53 8.11.2 Cassette Pickup Motor ..........................8 53 8.11.3 Cassette Lifter Motor ..........................
Page 14 Contents 9.6 Parts Replacement Procedure ........................... 9 24 9.6.1 Fixing Unit ..............................9 24 9.6.2 Fixing Roller .............................. 9 25 9.6.3 Pressure Roller ............................9 29 9.6.4 External Heat Roller........................... 9 32 9.6.5 Fixing Thermistor (Upper) ......................... 9 36 9.6.6 Fixing Thermistor (Lower)......................... 9 38 9.6.7 External Heat Thermistor ...........................
Page 15 Contents 10.5.16 Primary Exhaust Fan..........................10 39 10.5.17 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ........................10 42 10.5.18 Power Supply Cooing Fan ........................10 46 10.5.19 Delivery Cooling Fan 1........................10 47 10.5.20 Delivery Cooling Fan 2........................10 48 10.5.21 Ozone Filter ............................10 49 10.5.22 Toner Filter ............................
Page 16 Contents 12.5.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit ................12 26 12.5.5 After Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly ................. 12 29 12.5.6 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire ..................12 29 12.5.7 After Replacing the Pre Transfer Charging Wire.................. 12 29 12.5.8 After Replacing the Pre Transfer Charging Wire..................
Page 17 Contents 13.2.2 Test Print TYPE ............................13 4 13.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE ........................13 4 13.2.4 16 Gradation (TYPE=4).......................... 13 5 13.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5)......................... 13 6 13.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6)............................13 7 13.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10) ....................13 8 13.2.8 64 Gradation (TYPE=12)........................
Page 18 Contents 14.3.23 E073 ..............................14 28 14.3.24 E077 ..............................14 28 14.3.25 E078 ..............................14 28 14.3.26 E079 ..............................14 28 14.3.27 E100 ..............................14 29 14.3.28 E110 ..............................14 29 14.3.29 E197 ..............................14 30 14.3.30 E202 ..............................14 30 14.3.31 E225 ..............................
Page 19 Contents 14.3.77 E731..............................14 53 14.3.78 E732..............................14 53 14.3.79 E733..............................14 54 14.3.80 E740..............................14 54 14.3.81 E743..............................14 54 14.3.82 E744..............................14 55 14.3.83 E745..............................14 55 14.3.84 E746..............................14 56 14.3.85 E747..............................14 56 14.3.86 E800..............................14 59 14.3.87 E804..............................
Page 20 Contents 15.6.3 SORTER............................... 15 175 15.6.4 BOARD ..............................15 176 15.6.5 OPTION (mechanical specifications setting mode):Level 2............... 15 176 15.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ..........................15 211 15.7.1 COPIER..............................15 211 15.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode)........................15 217 15.8.1 COPIER..............................15 217 Chapter 16 Upgrading 16.1 Outline ................................
Page 21: Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction...
Page 23 Contents Contents 1.1 System Construction............................1 1 1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories ................1 1 1.1.2 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories ..............1 2 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ..................1 3 1.2 Product Specifications ............................1 4 1.2.1 Names of Parts............................. 1 4 1.2.1.1 External View............................
Page 25: System Construction
Chapter 1 1.1 System Construction 1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories 0002-5061 The machine may be configured as follows with pickup/delivery accessories F-1-1 [1] Finisher R1 [2] Saddle Finisher R2 [3] Additionary Finisher Tray A1 [4] Puncher Unit L1 [5] Shift Tray C1 [6] Delivery Tray K1 [7] Side Paper Deck U1 * If any of the accessories [1] through [3] is used, the accessories [5] and [6] cannot be used as part of the system.
Page 26: System Configuration With Printing/Transmission Accessories
Chapter 1 1.1.2 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories 0002-7413 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories: F-1-2 [1] iR Security Kit [2] SEND Expansion Kit D1P/D1U (dongle for extended functions) [3] Image Conversion Board A2 [4] USB Interface Board A3, or TokenRing Board (optional for 120V model) [5] UFR Board (standard for N model) [6] Ethernet Board (standard) [7] Super G3 Fax Board P1 (optional for 100V model)
Page 27: Functions Of Printing/Transmitting Accessories
Chapter 1 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories 0006-4753 The following is a table of functions expected of printing/transmitting accessories: T-1-1 UFR Printer/ SEND Expansion Image Conversion USB Interface Super G3 Fax Scanner Kit C1 Kit DIP/DIU Board A2 Board A3 Board P1 GDI UFR printing yes*...
Page 28: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 1.2 Product Specifications 1.2.1 Names of Parts 1.2.1.1 External View 0002-7878 [11] [10] F-1-3 [1] Original pickup tray [2] Manual feed tray [3] Main power switch [4] Right front paper deck [5] Cassette 4 [6] Cassette 3 [7] Left front paper deck [8] Front cover [9] Black toner supply cover [10] Control panel LCD (touch panel)
Page 29 Chapter 1 F-1-4 [1] Copyboard glass [2] Control panel [3] Feeding assembly release lever [4] Door switch assembly [5] Service book case [6] Leakage breaker [7] Cassette heater switch [8] Environment switch...
Page 30 Chapter 1 1.2.1.2 Cross Section 0002-8944 [54] [53] [10] [52] [11] [51] [12] [50] [13] [49] [14] [48] [15] [47] [16] [17] [46] [18] [45] [19] [55] [44] [20] [21] [43] [22] [23] [42] [24] [41] [25] [40] [26] [39] [27] [38] [28]...
Page 31 Chapter 1 [16] Patch image read sensor [17] Pre transfer charging assembly [18] ITB drive roller [19] Tension roller [20] Manual feed roller [21] Manual feed separation roller [22] Manual feed pull off roller [23] Registration roller [24] Secondary transfer outside roller [25] Right deck feed roller [26] Right deck separation roller [27] Right deck pickup roller...
Page 32: Using The Machine
Chapter 1 1.2.2 Using the Machine 1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch 0002-9498 The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. Normally, the machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in power save mode, low power mode, sleep mode).
Page 33: Points To Note About Turing Off The Main Power Switch
Chapter 1 1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turing Off the Main Power Switch 0002-9561 Be sure to turn off the control panel power switch [2] before turning off the main power switch [1]. F-1-8 When Sending Data to the Printer or Using the Fax Unit Be sure that the Execution/Memory lamp [2] on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch.
Page 34: Control Panel
Chapter 1 When Downloading Is Under Way Do not turn off the control panel switch [2] or the main power switch [1]. (Turning off the main power switch while downloading is under way can disable the machine.) F-1-10 1.2.2.3 Control Panel 0002-9566 [1] [2] [3] [4] [7] [8]...
Page 35: User Mode Items
Chapter 1 [5] Keypad [6] Power Save key [7] Control panel power switch [8] Counter key [9] Clip recess [10] Stop key [11] Start key [12] Main power indicator lamp [13] Error indicator lamp [14] Execute/Memory indicator lamp [15] Clear key [16] ID key [17] Screen contrast dial 1.2.3 User Mode Items...
Page 36 Chapter 1 Item Description reception/fax: *manual off, other on other: *manual off, other on paper type registration change power save mode * 10%, 25%, 50%, no return time power consumption in sleep *low, high LTRR/STMT original distinction manual, *on at LTRR, on at STMT special tray setup (indicated only if w/ finisher) priority on output...
Page 37: Setting The Timers
Chapter 1 1.2.3.2 Setting the Timers 0002-9585 * Factory setting. T-1-3 Mode Description date/time enable time zone, *daylight saving auto sleep time 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 1 hr, 90 min, 2, 3, 4 hr auto clear time 0=no; 1... *2... 9 min (in 1 min increment) weekly timer 00:00 to 23:59 (1 min increment) from Sunday to Saturday low power mode shift time length...
Page 38: Report
Chapter 1 1.2.3.4 Report 0002-9587 * Factory setting. T-1-5 Item Description transmit (specifications) transmission result report: *only if error, on, off transmitted original display: *on, off communications control report auto print every 100 communications: *on, off timed as specified: on, *off *00:00 to 2:59 send/receive separate: yes, *no fax (specifications)
Page 39: System Control Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.3.5 System Control Settings 0002-9588 * Factory setting T-1-6 Item Description system administrator info yes using ID, address group ID ON/*OFF communications control setup yes using e mail, fax, box remote UI *ON/OFF address book limit ID No., access NO.: ON/*OFF device information setup device name, location transfer setup...
Page 40: Common Transmission Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.3.7 Common Transmission Settings 0002-9590 * Factory setting. T-1-8 Item Description common transmission setup source register (99 max.) user abbreviation (various settings) FTP transmission (ON/*OFF) error file clear (*ON/OFF) transfer error file (print always, save and print, *off) retry (*3 times;...
Page 41: Box Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.3.8 Box Settings 0002-9591 T-1-9 Item Description box function setup user box setup, register (99 max.) read in setup (register, initialize) fax box setup, register (49 max.) 1.2.3.9 Printer Settings 0002-9592 * Factory setting. T-1-10 Item Description setting copy count (1 to 2000: *1) double sided (double sided, *single sided) blank paper save (*yes, no)
Page 42: User Maintenance
Chapter 1 Item Description halftone (image: resolution, *gradation, error diffusion) printer initialize (yes, no) LIPS, emulation (12 items) utility printer initialize (yes, no) 1.2.3.10 Address Book Settings 0002-9593 T-1-11 Item Description address register various times address list name register register one touch button register various items 1.2.4 User Maintenance...
Page 43 Chapter 1 2. Platen Roller Wipe the platen roller [1] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well wrung); thereafter, dry wipe it with a soft cloth. F-1-13 3. Copyboard Glass, ADF Reading Glass Wipe the copyboard glass [1] and the DF reading glass [2] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well wrung);...
Page 44: Inspection
Chapter 1 5. Vertical Size Plate Wipe the vertical size plate [1] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of middle detergent (well wrung); thereafter, dry wipe it with a soft cloth. F-1-16 1.2.4.2 Inspection 0003-4230 The machine is equipped with a breaker to protect against over current and leakage current, and it is important to check the operation of the leakage breaker to ensure a higher level of safety.
Page 45 Chapter 1 3) Check to see that the breaker switch [1] has shifted to the OFF side, thus cutting off the power. （○side）（ side） F-1-18 4) Turn off the main power switch. 5) Shift the breaker switch [1] back to the ON side. ( side) (I side) F-1-19...
Page 46: Safety
Chapter 1 1.2.5 Safety 1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light 0002-9596 Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its light will not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally. 1.2.5.2 Regulations by the us Center for Devices and Radiological Health 0002-9598 The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put input force a set of...
Page 47: Handling The Laser Unit
Chapter 1 1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit 0002-9599 Points to Note When Servicing Areas Around the Laser Scanner System do not put an item with a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the laser path. remove watches and rings before starting the work (they tend to reflect the laser beam, possibly exposing the eye). The light from the machine's laser unit is red.
Page 48: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 1.2.6 Product Specifications 1.2.6.1 Specifications 0002-5126 Copyboard fixed Body console Light source type xenon lamp Lens type fixed focus, lens array Photosensitive medium A Si drum (1 pc.) Image reading method light receiving element (RGB line CCD) Reproduction method by laser beam, indirect electro photographic Exposure method by laser...
Page 49 Chapter 1 Original type sheet, book, 3 D object (2 kg max.) Maximum original size 297 x 432 mm Original size detection function by fixed sensor in combination with CCD: in relation to opening/ closing of copyboard cover Reproduction ratio 100% (1:1), reduce (1:0.250, 1:0.500, 1:0.611, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.865), enlarge (1:1.154, 1:1.224, 1:1.414, 1:2.000, 1:4.000), between (1:0.250 to 4.000) (25% and 400%, in 1% increments)
Page 50 Chapter 1 Paper deck paper type deck left/right: plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), heavy paper (209 g/m2 max.), recycled paper (80 g/m2), colored paper (80 g/mm2), label paper (80 g/m2) Duplex paper type plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), recycled paper (80 g/m2), color paper (80 gm/2), heavy paper (163 g/m2 max.), heavy paper (163 g/2 max.;...
Page 51: Function List
Chapter 1 1.2.7 Function List 1.2.7.1 Print Speed 0002-5174 T-1-12 Manual feeder Cassette/deck Cassette/deck (single sided) (singe sided) (double sided) Paper type Paper size Color Mono Color Mono Color Mono Plain paper mode (64 to 105 g/m2) 11"×17" (279mm×432mm) 12"×18" (305mm×458mm) 13"×19"...
Page 52 Chapter 1 Manual feeder Cassette/deck Cassette/deck (single sided) (singe sided) (double sided) Paper type Paper size Color Mono Color Mono Color Mono Heavy paper mode 2 (164 to 209 g/m2) 11"×17" (279mm×432mm) 12"×18" (305mm×458mm) 13"×19" (330mm×482mm) B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R A4, LTR, B5 Heavy paper mode 3 (210 to 253 g/m2)
Page 53: Paper Type
Chapter 1 1.2.7.2 Paper Type 0002-5154 T-1-13 Source of paper Paper type Paper size Cassette Deck (left/right) Manual feeder Plain paper A3, B4, A4R, (64 to 105g/m2) 279mm×432mm Eco paper (11"×17"), LGL, LTRR Recycled paper A4, B5, LTR Heavy paper mode 1,2 (106 to 209g/m2) 305mm×457mm(12"×18"), 330mm×482mm(13"×19")
Page 54 Chapter 1 1.2.7.3 Accessories 0003-5843 The following accessories are offered for the machine: 1. Finisher R1 2. Saddle Finisher R2 3. Additional Finisher Tray A1 (Japanese model only) 4. Puncher Unit L1 5. Side paper Deck U1 6. Shift Tray C1 7.
Page 55: Chapter 2 Installation
Chapter 2 Installation...
Page 57 Contents Contents 2.1 Making Pre Checks ............................2 1 2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation........................2 1 2.1.2 Installation Environment ..........................2 3 2.1.3 Checking the Contents..........................2 4 2.2 Unpacking and Installation..........................2 6 2.2.1 Before Starting the Work ..........................2 6 2.2.2 Unpacking the Machine..........................
Page 58 2.8.1 Checking the Contents ..........................2 51 2.8.2 Installation ..............................2 51 2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit A1 ........................2 53 2.9.1 Checking the Contents ..........................2 53 2.9.2 Installation ..............................2 53...
Page 59: Making Pre Checks
Chapter 2 2.1 Making Pre Checks 2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation 0002-6395 Be sure that the site of installation satisfies the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine: There must be a properly grounded power outlet that is rated as indicated (+/ 10%) and that may be used exclusively by the machine.
Page 60 Chapter 2 Copier [1] 10cm 50cm 50cm 50cm 210cm min F-2-1 Copier [1] + Punch Unit [2] + Finisher [3] + Side Deck [4] 10cm 50cm 50cm 50cm 310cm F-2-2...
Page 61: Installation Environment
Chapter 2 The machine will be placed on the side of the slope plate having a pin hole [1]. Be sure that the space will be on this side (left side). The side of the slope plate having a pin hole (left) is where the delivery side of the machine will be, with the front of the machine facing the side indicated by the arrow.
Page 62: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.3 Checking the Contents 0002-6404 The following shows the contents of the shipping box found with the machine: [10] [12] [15] [13] [14] [11] [20] [19] [16] [17] [18] [23] [21] [24] [22] F-2-5 [1] Black toner bottle (black; only for 100/230V AU model)..1 pc. [2] Color toner cartridge (cyan, magenta, yellow;...
Page 63 Chapter 2 [9] Cassette size label* .........2 pc. [10] ADF size label ..........1 pc. [11] Grounding cord (100 V model only) ......1 pc. [12] QR sheet (100 V model only) ........1 pc. [13] Power cord (230 V model only) ........1 pc. [14] Service book ..........1 pc.
Page 64: Unpacking And Installation
Chapter 2 2.2 Unpacking and 2.2.2 Unpacking the Installation Machine 0002-6411 1) Open the shipping box, and remove the plastic 2.2.1 Before Starting the covers. 2) Fit the 2 included grips [2] into the grip slots [1] Work 0002-6409 found on the pickup side of the machine. Keep the following in mind when installing the machine: 1.
Page 65 Chapter 2 Check to make sure that the caster [1] has not rolled off the skid [2]. Also, be sure that it has not ridden over the edge [3] of the skid. F-2-8 5) Move the machine in the direction of the arrow; then, take out the 2 slope plates [2] from the middle of the skid [1].
Page 66 Chapter 2 11) Fit the 2 included pickup assembly face plate [2] 14) Fix the right cover (lower rear) [2] in place with 2 over the holes [1] from which you have removed the screws [1]. grips. F-2-13 12) Remove the 2 screws [1], and rear right cover [2]. F-2-16 15) Shift down the 2 grips [1] on the delivery side as shown so that they are inside the machine.
Page 67: Mounting The Pickup Assembly
Chapter 2 2.2.3 Mounting the Pickup Assembly 0002-6414 1) Detach the 3 shipping tags [1] from the upper right cover and the lower right cover. F-2-21 F-2-19 When mounting the left deck locking plate, take care 2) Open the upper right cover [1] and the lower right not to trap the left deck cable by the plate.
Page 68: Locking The Primary Transfer Roller In Place
Chapter 2 2.2.5 Locking the Primary 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2]. Transfer Roller in Place 0002-6568 1) Lift the primary transfer roller locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to lock the roller in place; then, fix the primary transfer roller locking lever [1] in place using the included binding screw (M4x8) [2].
Page 69 Chapter 2 5) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front 9) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully cover; then, fully open the front cover [2]. open the hopper assembly [2]. F-2-31 10) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] found at the upper F-2-28 right.
Page 70 Chapter 2 12) Free the connector cable [1] of the high voltage 14) Hold the drum fixing member [1] in place using side from the 2 wire saddles [2] to avoid trapping it. the drum stop tool [2]. Then, using a screwdriver, (Keep it on the cable hook [3] during the work.) remove the drum fixing screw [3].
Page 71 Chapter 2 16) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. F-2-38 17) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing F-2-41 lever [1] in the direction of the arrow. 20) Lift both ends [1] of the process unit slightly; then, fully slide out the process unit [2] to the front. F-2-39 18) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] to the front.
Page 72: Mounting The Color Developing Assemblies
Chapter 2 2.2.7 Mounting the Color Developing Assemblies 0002-6670 If you must touch a color developing assembly, be sure that your hands are free of foreign matter (especially of metal) before dong so. (Adhesion of foreign matter on the cylinder is likely to cause image faults.) 1) Take out the color developing assembly (yellow, F-2-44...
Page 73 Chapter 2 6) Have the appropriate color developing assembly on Toner and starter can start to leak when the sponge hand by checking the ID mark [1] attached to the has been detached. Do not keep the supply mouth developing rotary assembly. facing down during the work.
Page 74 Chapter 2 12) Close the 2 developing assembly fixing arms [1] 15) Loosen the screw [2] used to hold the torque in the direction of the arrows; then, fix them in place limiter [1] of the developing rotary in place; then, using 2 screws [2].
Page 75: Mounting The Black Developing Assembly
Chapter 2 2.2.8 Mounting the Black 3) Turn the developing cylinder gear [1] by hand to check for scratches on the cylinder. Developing Assembly 0002-6683 Do not touch the area [2] of the developing cylinder cover indicated in the diagram; otherwise, the If you must touch a black developing assembly, be blade can leave its trace on the cylinder.
Page 76 Chapter 2 Be sure also that the rib [4] at the front of the 7) Route the cable [1] having the tube of the black developing assembly matches the right guide at the developing assembly through the hole [2] indicated in front of the machine.
Page 77: Mounting The Process Unit
Chapter 2 10) Fix the joint plate [1] in place using 2 binding screws [2]. F-2-67 F-2-65 14) Close the process unit. 11) Remove the paper put between the photosensitive Take care not to trap the cable found at the right front drum and the developing rotary.
Page 78 Chapter 2 2) Fit the 2 cables [1] into the cable clamp [2]. 6) Fix the cable [1] of the black developing assembly 3) Connect the 2 connectors [3], and fit the 2 cables in place using the harness guide [2]. [4] into the 3 cable guides [5].
Page 79 Chapter 2 2. Check to be sure that the protrusion of the drum Be sure to use the binding screws. The use of RS fixing member is between he markings [1] "." and ".." tightening screws in the area of aluminum die casting of the drum flange.
Page 80 Chapter 2 11) Loose the screw [1], and move the charging 18) Secure the hopper assembly [1] in place using 3 assembly fixing [2] in the upper right direction; then, screws [2]. fix it in place using a screw. 12) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the primary charging assembly [4].
Page 81: Mounting The Fixing Assembly
Chapter 2 2.2.10 Mounting the Fixing 23) Close the right deck. 24) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. Assembly 0002-6697 25) Open the color toner supply cover [1]. 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly fully. 2) Open the reversal delivery cover [1]. F-2-83 F-2-86 26) Fix the process unit cover [1] in place using the 2...
Page 82: Fitting The Black Toner Bottle
Chapter 2 5) Remove the 2 fixing nip releasing screws [1]. 9) Mount back the fixing front cover and the fixing knob by reversing the work in step 7). 10) Close the middle cover. 11) Close the reversal delivery cover. 12) Close the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 83: Checking The Environment Switch
Chapter 2 2.2.12 Checking 4) Hold the black toner bottle with its mouth [1] on the right side; then, fit it in the supply case [2] of the Environment Switch 0002-6701 machine. 1) Set the environment switch to suit the site of installation.
Page 84: Turning On The Main Power Switch
Chapter 2 2.2.13 Turning On the 2.2.14 Setting Up the Paper Main Power Switch Cassette 0003-1015 0002-6732 1) Press the cassette release button, and slide out the cassette to the front. 1. Be sure to remove all packing material from the 2) Check with the user to find out the type of paper to cassette before turning on the main power.
Page 85: Changing The Deck Paper Size (Right, Left)
Chapter 2 12) Fit the color toner cartridge replacement supply tab to the back of the front cover; then, close the front cover. 2.2.15 Changing the Deck Paper Size (right, left) 0002-6733 1) Open the front cover. F-2-100 2) Push the release button, and slide out the right deck. 3) Remove the screws [4] (3 pc.
Page 86: Fitting The Color Toner Cartridge
Chapter 2 6) As necessary, perform the same work on the left 3) Check to see that the control panel indicates the deck. message "Set the Toner Cartridge." 7) After changing the size, execute the following in 4) Open the front cover. service mode to register the front deck paper size: for 5) Open the color toner supply cover [1].
Page 87: Supplying Black Toner
Chapter 2 2.2.19 Supplying Color 12) See that the control panel indicates the message "Set the Toner Cartridge." Toner 0002-6729 13) Repeat steps 4) through 9 to set the M toner cartridge. 1) Execute the following service mode item to set up color toner settings: 2.2.17 Supplying Black FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSET 3...
Page 88: Setting Auto Gradation Correction
Chapter 2 2.2.20 Setting Auto 2.2.21 Checking the Image/ Gradation Correction Operation 0002-6731 0002-6730 1) Clean the reading glass surface of the machine's 1) Place the Test Chart on the copyboard glass, and copyboard. make copies using the cassettes and the deck as the 2) Press the User Mode key.
Page 89 Chapter 2 Left Deck 1) Press the release button, and slide out the left deck. 2) Remove the left face cover [1] using a flat blade screwdriver. F-2-110 move the adjusting plate toward the rear to increase the left margin. F-2-112 move the adjusting screw toward the front to decrease the left margin.
Page 90 Chapter 2 5) If the output is not as indicated, make the following 4) Check to make sure that the horizontal registration adjustments: (left/right marking; L1) of the copy made on paper from the right deck is 2.5 +/ 1.5 mm. image F-2-117 F-2-115...
Page 91: Adjusting The Leading Edge Registration
Chapter 2 Manual Feed Tray If not, go through the following: 1) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and move the slide guide Make the following selections in service mode: [2] to adjust the horizontal registration. COPIER>ADJUST>FEED ADJ>REGIST. Then, change the setting to make adjustments. (A change of '1' moves the leading edge registration by 0.1 mm.
Page 92: If Not Connected To A Network
Chapter 2 4) Fit the touch pen [1] in place on the control panel. Areas to Avoid inside the machine (behind the front cover) louver grip slot 3) As appropriate, attach the 3 included labels ([1], F-2-125 [2], [3]) to the locations indicated in the figure: [1] Do Not Copy label (non Japanese model) [2] Cleaning Instructions label (non Japans model) 5) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out...
Page 93: Checking The Connection To The Network
Chapter 2 2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network 2.3.1 Overview 0002-6738 Go through the steps herein only if the machine is connected to a network. If the user's network is based on TCP/IP, use the PING utility to make sure that the Ethernet PCB has properly been installed and the network settings have correctly been made.
Page 94: Troubleshooting The Network
Chapter 2 2.4 Troubleshooting the Network 2.4.1 Overview 0002-6749 Go through the steps herein only if the machine is connected to a network. If the machine's connection to the network fails, suspect the following causes: a. The connection between the network and the Ethernet PCB is faulty. b.
Page 95: Relocating The Machine
Chapter 2 2.5 Relocating the Machine 2.5.1 Relocating the Machine 0002-6757 If you need to relocate the machine after installation, be sure to go through the following: 1) Remove all paper from the left/right deck and the cassettes. 2) Turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power plug. If the grounding wire is connected, remove it. 3) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw stored away from the time of installation.
Page 96: Installing The Card Reader C1
Chapter 2 2.6 Installing the Card Reader C1 2.6.1 Points to Note About Installation 0002-6804 You need a Card Reader Mounting Kit C1 for the installation. 2.6.2 Checking the Contents 0003-0860 <Card Reader C1> [1] Card Reader C1 ....1 pc. [2] RS tightening screw (M4x10) ..1 pc.
Page 97: Installation
Chapter 2 2.6.3 Installation 0002-6753 1) Make the following selections in the host machine's service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD; then, enter a number (1 to 2001). Use the lowest number of the cards that will be used by the usered. As many as 300 cards, starting with the number you enter, will be registered. 2) Turn off the host machine's main power switch.
Page 98 Chapter 2 6) Mount the card reader [2] to the card reader base [3] using the included screw and toothed washer [1]. F-2-133 7) Route the card reader harness through the wire saddle, and connect the connector [1]. F-2-134 8) Cut the section [1] of the right cover (upper) indicated in the figure using nippers. F-2-135 9) Mount the right cover (upper) you removed in step 3).
Page 99: Using The Card Reader In Combination With Netspot Accountant (Hereafter, Nsa)
Chapter 2 2.6.4 Using the Card Reader in Combination with NetSpot Accountant (hereafter, NSA) 0002-6799 1) Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>group ID control>count control; then, check to see IDs 00000001 thorough 00001000 have been created (i.e., if you entered '1' as the first number in service mode): COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD).
Page 100: Installing The Ne Controller A1
Chapter 2 2.7 Installing the NE Controller A1 2.7.1 NE Controller A1 Installation Procedure 0003-6957 Keep the following in mind when installing the NE Controller A1 to its host machine: 1. The work must be performed in strict compliance with the laws and regulations of the local authorities. 2.
Page 101 Chapter 2 3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the face plate [2] of the host machine's rear cover (upper). F-2-138 4) Connect the cable [1] of the controller to the host machine's connector [2]. F-2-139 5) Mount the controller [1] to the host machine's rear cover (upper) using 4 screws [2]. (Use the screws that come with the controller.) F-2-140 2-43...
Page 102 Chapter 2 6) Take up the slack from the cable used between the controller and its host machine; bundle the extra length of the cable, and fix the bundle in place on the host machine using a harness band [1]. F-2-141 7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW2 4) found on the PCB to the ON side (so that the communication between the controller and the host machine will be in IPC mode).
Page 103 Chapter 2 If IC6 [1] is not found, you need not mount one. If you are mounting or replacing a ROM (IC6) [1] to upgrade the controller, be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch (SW2 7) [2] to the ON side. 9) Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW3) [1] on the PCB as indicated.
Page 104 Chapter 2 10) Connect the power plug to the power supply unit; then, check to see that LED1 [1] (green) on the PCB goes on. LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-145 11) Initialize the RAM of the controller as follows: Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [1] on the PCB as shown in the table;...
Page 105 Chapter 2 12) When LED5 [1] (red) has gone on, set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [2] on the PCB as indicated in the following table; then, press the push switch (SW4) [3]. A press on the push switch (SW4) [3] will cause LED5 [1] (red) to go off, indicating that the RAM has been initialized.
Page 106 Chapter 2 14) Connect the telephone line to the controller. If the controller is to be used on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the connector (LINE) [1] of the control. If the extension function of the controller is to be used, connect the existing telephone or fax to the connector (TEL) [2] of the controller while connecting the telephone line to the connector (LINE) [1] of the controller.
Page 107 Chapter 2 17) Call the PC at the service station using the controller. Press the push switch (SW4) [1] on the PCB. A press on the push switch (SW4) [1] will cause LED6 (red) [2] to go on; at the end of the transmission, LED6 (red) [2] goes off.
Page 108 Chapter 2 20) Attach the switch settings label [1] to the top cover of the controller, and record the new switch settings. 21) Fix the top cover [2] of the controller in place using 2 screws [3]. When doing so, check to be sure that the cable of the power supply unit is fixed in place to the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the top cover [2].
Page 109: Installing The Original Tray
Chapter 2 2.8 Installing the Original Tray 2.8.1 Checking the Contents 0002-6801 [1] Original holder ..1 pc. [2] Stepped screw (M4) ...2 pc. F-2-155 2.8.2 Installation 0002-6754 1) Fit the 2 stepped screws [2] in the right cover (upper) [1]. F-2-156 2-51...
Page 110 Chapter 2 2) Hook the original holder [1] on the stepped screws you fitted in step 1). F-2-157 2-52...
Page 111: Installing The Key Switch Unit A1
Chapter 2 2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit A1 2.9.1 Checking the Contents 0003-1366 Key Switch Unit [1] Key switch unit ..1 pc. [2] Control key ...1 pc. [3] Binding screw (M4x6) ..1 pc. F-2-158 2.9.2 Installation 0002-6756 1) Turn off the control panel power switch. 2) Turn off the main power switch.
Page 112 Chapter 2 6) Cut off the section [1] of the right cover (upper rear) indicated in the figure. F-2-160 7) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the plate [2]. F-2-161 8) Fit the protrusion [1] of the key switch into the plate [2]; then, fix it in place using the included screw [3]. F-2-162 2-54...
Page 113 Chapter 2 9) Route the harness [1] of the key switch through the wire saddle [2]. F-2-163 10) Connect the connector [1] of the key switch. F-2-164 2-55...
Page 114 Chapter 2 11) Fix the plate (key switch) [1] in place using the 2 screws [2] you removed in step 7). F-2-165 12) Mount the right cover (upper rear) you removed in step 5). 13) Connect the power plug, and turn on the main power switch. 14) Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>KEY: then, enter '1'.
Page 115: Chapter 3 Basic Operation
Chapter 3 Basic Operation...
Page 117 Contents Contents 3.1 Construction ............................... 3 1 3.1.1 Functional Construction ..........................3 1 3.1.2 Arrangement of the Major PCBs......................... 3 3 3.1.3 DC Controller .............................. 3 4 3.2 Basic Sequence..............................3 6 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On ....................3 6 3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Control During Printing (full color) ................
Page 119: Construction
Chapter 3 3.1 Construction 3.1.1 Functional Construction 0002-9602 The machine is broadly divided into the following 3: reader unit, printer unit, and system unit. Of these 3, the printer unit serves as the core of the machine, and consists of the following 5 functional blocks: laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/feed system, fixing/delivery system, printer control system.
Page 120 Chapter 3 2.Printer Unit [C]Laser Exposure System [6] laser/scanner unit [D]Image Formation System [7] photosensitive drum [8] Bk developing assembly [9] M developing assembly [10]Y developing assembly [11]C developing assembly [12]intermediate transfer belt (ITB) [E] Pickup/Feeding System [13] pickup control assembly [14] transfer assembly [15] lower feeding assembly [16] left deck...
Page 121: Arrangement Of The Major Pcbs
Chapter 3 3.1.2 Arrangement of the Major PCBs 0002-9608 Arrangement of the Major PCBs J1802 J116 J121 J250 J115 J119 J122 J252, J251 J1810 J123 J127 J2118 J1105 J1130 J1135 J1203 J1212 J1201, J1301 J1204 1202 J1101 J1102,1134 J1901,1902 J1104 J353 J1111B J1501...
Page 122: Dc Controller
Chapter 3 3.1.3 DC Controller 0002-9609 The following shows the functional construction of the DC controller PCB: IC21 IC29 IC35 IC40 IC41 IC47 BAT1 F-3-3 BAT1 (lithium battery) serves as the backup battery for RAM. IC21 (PWM IC) converts image data from ASIC1 into data processed by pulse width modulation. IC29 (ASIC1) controls the laser driver, high voltage mechanisms, fixing control mechanisms, and motors.
Page 123 Chapter 3 BATI IC35 IC47 (CPU) IC40 (Flash-ROM) IC41 (ASIC2) IC21 (PWM-IC) IC29 (ASIC1) F-3-4 [1] Finisher (accessory) [2] Side paper deck (accessory) [3] Motors [4] Main controller PCB [5] Loads (sensor, clutch, solenoid) [6] Laser drive PCB [7] BD PCB [8] HVT [9] Fixing assembly...
Page 124: Basic Sequence
Chapter 3 3.2 Basic Sequence 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 0005-0125 T-3-1 Period Description WMUP (warm up) with the drive system at rest, until the temperature of the external heating roller reaches 190 deg C. SREADY (scanner ready) from when shading correction ends unit the Start key is pressed or the main power switch is turned off.
Page 125 Chapter 3 Main switch Shading correction SREADY STBY Scanner motor (M501) Scanning lamp (LA1) Scanner HP sensor (PS501) Shading Shading position *1 position Shading position :forward Gain adjustment :reverse Offset adjustment Main switch WMUP WMUPR PSTBY About 510sec Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater 200 degrees...
Page 126: Basic Sequence Of Control During Printing (Full Color)
Chapter 3 3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Control During Printing (full color) 0004-7828 A4, Full color (1 print), Right deck T-3-2 Period Description PSTBY (print standby) the machine is ready to receive the coy/print request signal. PINTR (initial rotation) from when the machine has received the print request signal to when it discharges paper. PRINT from when all toner has been transferred to paper and the paper is delivered.
Page 127: Basic Sequence Of Operation During Printing (Mono Color)
Chapter 3 [1] used to stabilize the rotation. [2] developing rotary shifts to home position>point of M development>point of Y development>point of C development>home position [3] preparation for black development [4] transfer to paper [5] cleaning of the secondary transfer outside roller [6] pickup from the right deck [7] maintenance operation of the fixing roller [8] anti deformation operation of the fixing roller (every 30 min after the stop of the fixing roller)
Page 128 Chapter 3 reading: book, 1 A4 original printing: A4, plain paper, single-sided, mono color, 1 print Start key PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Laser scanner motor(M1) PVREQ signal Laser Drum/ITB motor (M2) Primary charging bias Grid bias Developing rotary motor (M5) Black developing bias Color developing...
Page 129: Chapter 4 Main Controller
Chapter 4 Main Controller...
Page 131 Contents Contents 4.1 Construction ............................... 4 1 4.1.1 Functional Construction ..........................4 1 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ......................4 3 4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main) ........................4 3 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (sub) ......................... 4 5 4.2.3 Expansion Bus PCB ............................ 4 6 4.2.4 SRAM PCB ..............................
Page 132 4.7.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover (upper)...................... 4 36 4.7.4.2 Removing the Delivery Cover ......................4 37 4.7.4.3 Removing the Left Cover (middle)..................... 4 37 4.7.4.4 Removing the Controller Box Cover ....................4 37 4.7.4.5 Removing the SRAM Board....................... 4 38 4.7.4.6 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB ....................
Page 133: Construction
Chapter 4 4.1 Construction 4.1.1 Functional Construction 0003-2433 The machine's main controller block consists of the following components that serve specific functions: T-4-1 Item Description Main controller PCB (main) controls the system, memory, and printer output image processing. Main controller PCB (sub) processes reader input images.
Page 134 Chapter 4 Reader unit SRAM Expansion bus Main controller PCB (sub) Main controller DC control PCB PCB (main) Reader input image processing - system control BOOT ROM - printer output image processing Printer unit Image memory (SDRAM) F-4-1...
Page 135: Construction Of The Electrical Circuitry
Chapter 4 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main) 0002-0606 The following shows the major control functions of the main controller PCB (main) grouped according to jack/IC: J1101 J1102 IC31 J1103 J1104 J1105 IC35 J1106 IC15 IC12 IC23 J1112...
Page 136 Chapter 4 T-4-3 IC No. Description controls the processing of images coming from IC12 for output to the printer. IC12 controls image input/output functions, image rotation function, resolution conversion function, and binary processing function. IC15 controls the conversion of 4 bit serial image data coming from IC9 into 8 bit parallel image data;...
Page 137: Main Controller Pcb (Sub)
Chapter 4 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (sub) 0002-0688 The following shows the major functions of the main controller PCB (sub) grouped according to jack/IC: IC17 IC15 F-4-3 T-4-4 Jack No. Description J1302 connector for reader unit communication T-4-5 IC No. Description IC15 controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit.
Page 138: Expansion Bus Pcb
Chapter 4 4.2.3 Expansion Bus PCB 0002-0689 The following shows the major functions of the expansion bus PCB grouped according to jack/IC: IC10 IC12 F-4-4 T-4-6 Jack No. Description J1403 connector for the SRAM PCB. T-4-7 IC No. Description LCD controller IC10 NE controller, coin vendor, interface ASIC for card reader connection backup battery for SRAM...
Page 139: Hdd
Chapter 4 T-4-8 IC No. Description IC1,2,3 (SRAM) retains control information on the image data stored on the HDD; retains service mode settings data and Additional Function settings data 4.2.5 HDD 0003-3826 As many as 9 partitions (units or blocks of division) are created on the HDD, and each partition is assigned a specific task.
Page 140: Hdd
Chapter 4 The following shows the construction of the machine's system software: T-4-10 System software Function Location Remarks System system module (overall control) HDD (BOOTDEV) Language language module (LCD indication control) HDD (BOOTDEV) language module (remote UI control) HDD (BOOTDEV) Boot machine startup BootROM...
Page 141: Start Up Sequence
Chapter 4 4.3 Start Up Sequence 4.3.1 Overview 0000-7737 The system software used to control the operation of the machine is stored on the HDD. When the machine is started up, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD into the image memory (SDRAM) of the main controller PCB for use as instructed by the boot program of the boot ROM.
Page 142: Start Up Sequence
Chapter 4 4.3.2 Start Up Sequence 0000-7741 <Boot ROM Area> Self Diagnostic Program (interval 1) When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU of the main controller PCB runs a self diagnostic program, which checks the condition of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD. If a fault is found, the machine will indicate its presence by an error code.
Page 143 Chapter 4 - Self diagnosis program being executed Image memory (SDRAM) System area Image data area Self diagnosis Boot program program BootROM Main controller PCB (main) : access to program at time of execution. F-4-10 - Boot Program in Execution Image memory (SDRAM) System area Image data...
Page 144: Actions When Hdd Error
Chapter 4 4.4 Actions when HDD Error 4.4.1 E602 in Detail 0002-3236 If the machine suffers a fault associated with E602 xxyy, it calls for different remedial actions as identified by the sub code. if E602 xxyy is indicated, be sure always to turn off and then on the machine (so that it will run auto recovery sequence).
Page 145 Chapter 4 T-4-12 Partition Description DOSDEV 01, 02 The machine has encountered a read error or a file system error while starting up. FSTDEV DOSDEV2 Remedy: FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV if xxyy is 0701, 0702. DOSDEV4 Remedy: BOOTDEV Ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer settings, and DOSDEV5 not identified user mode data.
Page 146 Chapter 4 Partition Description if xxyy is 0813, 0825. Remedy: 10,12,14, The machine has encountered a system error or a packet data error. 22,23,24 Remedy: 1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to execute: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HDCHECK*.
Page 147 Chapter 4 1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to execute: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD CLEAR. 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. 1) Turn off the main power; then, turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys (so that the machine will automatically start its remedial program*, turning the control panel solid black).
Page 148: E609 In Detail
Chapter 4 4.4.2 E609 in Detail 0005-9582 E609 is an HDD error associated with the HDD from Samsung. See below for its cause and remedy. T-4-14 Code Detail Possible Cause/Description Remedy E609 Samsung HDD related error code 0000 at time of start up, there is no increase in Replace the HDD.
Page 149: Image Processing
Chapter 4 4.5 Image Processing 4.5.1 Overview of the Flow of Image Data 0003-2506 The following shows the flow of image data when the foregoing functions are used: Other iR machine Original Copy Scan - SEND - FAX - PullScan - E-Mail - PDL Print - BOX...
Page 150: Construction Of The Image Processing Modules
Chapter 4 4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Modules 0003-2509 The machine's major image processing mechanisms are carried out by the main controller PCB(main). The following shows the construction of the modules associated with these mechanisms: Reader controller Interface Reader unit Reader Input Image SRAM Expansion bus...
Page 151: Reader Input Image Processing
Chapter 4 4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing 0003-2928 The image data (RGB data) from the CCD unit is processed by the main controller PCB (sub). Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) IC15 IC17 Processing that takes RGB phase correction the place of conventional black character input masking;...
Page 152: Compression/Decompression And Editing Blocks
Chapter 4 4.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks 0000-7753 IC12 is used to compress/decompress and edit various data. Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) 4-image area signal Main controller PCB (main) Y M C Bk IC12 PDL input JPEG compression Resolution JPEG conversion/ decompression...
Page 153: Printer Output Image Processing
Chapter 4 4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing 0000-7754 Main controller PCB processes image data from the Reader unit for output to the printer. Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) area signal Main controller If ACS identifies the original PCB (man) as being black-and-white, the machine generates the Bk signal here.
Page 154: Flow Of Image Data
Chapter 4 4.6 Flow of Image Data 4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function) 0000-7755 The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used: Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) DC controller PCB JPEG Magnification...
Page 155: Flow Of Image Data (Box Function)
Chapter 4 4.6.2 Flow of Image Data (Box function) 0000-7757 The following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used. Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) DC controller PCB Decompression JPEG decompression conversion...
Page 156: Flow Of Image Data (Send Function)
Chapter 4 4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (SEND function) 0000-7760 The following shows the flow of image data when SEND functions are used. Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) Resolution JPEG conversion decompression for B/Wimage Binary Rotation...
Page 157: Flow Of Image Data (Fax Transmission)
Chapter 4 4.6.4 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission) 0000-7764 The following shows the flow of image data when fax transmission functions are used: Reader unit Main controller PCB (sub) image area signal Main controller PCB (main) Resolution JPEG conversion compression JPEG Rotation...
Page 158: Image Data Flow For Fax Reception Functions
Chapter 4 4.6.5 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions 0000-7766 The following is the flow of image data used for fax reception functions. DC controller PCB Main controller PCB (main) Resolution conversion Rotation SDRAM Image conversion board Fax board F-4-21 4-26...
Page 159: Flow Of Image Data (Pdl Function)
Chapter 4 4.6.6 Flow of Image Data (PDL function) 0000-7770 The following shows the flow of image data when PDL functions are used: Display list data GDI-UFR Reader unit LIPS data LIPS PS pint server Main controller PS data unit*1 PCB (sub) Open interface UFR board...
Page 160: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 4 4.7 Parts Replacement 4.7.1.3 Removing the Left Cover (middle) 0003-8289 Procedure 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover 4.7.1 Controller Box (middle) [3]. 4.7.1.1 Removing the Left Cover (upper) 0003-8275 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the left cover (upper) [2].
Page 161: Controller Box
Chapter 4 4.7.1.6 Removing the 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (upper) [2]. Controller Box 0002-9795 1) Disconnect the 9 connectors [1]. F-4-30 F-4-27 4.7.1.5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0003-5527 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the controller box cover [2].
Page 162 Chapter 4 F-4-36 F-4-33 4) Slide the main controller box [1] toward the 3) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to fix the main delivery side to detach. controller box in place. F-4-37 F-4-34 During removal/mounting, be sure to take care not to damage the connector [2] found at the joint to the DC controller PCB.
Page 163: Main Controller Pcb (Main)
Chapter 4 4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) 4.7.2.3 Removing the Rear Cover (upper) 0003-8310 4.7.2.1 Removing the Delivery 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3]. Cover 0003-8280 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2].
Page 164: Main Controller Pcb (Main)
Chapter 4 4.7.2.4 Removing 2) Remove the boot ROM [1] and the image memory (SDRAM) [2]. Controller Box Cover 0003-6135 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3]. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the controller box cover [2]. F-4-46 4) Remove the 2 screws each [1] [3] [5], and detach the following: F-4-43...
Page 165 Chapter 4 7) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to hold the main controller box in place. F-4-49 6) Free the harness from the 3 harness retainers [1]. F-4-52 F-4-50 F-4-53 F-4-51 F-4-54 4-33...
Page 166 Chapter 4 8) Slide the main controller box [1] toward the delivery side. F-4-58 F-4-55 4.7.2.6 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) 0003-6168 When sliding the DC controller box, be sure to After mounting the main controller PCB (main), be take care so as not to damage the connector [2] in the sure to attach all PCBs you may have removed before joint to the DC controller PCB.
Page 167: Main Controller Pcb (Sub)
Chapter 4 4.7.3.2 Removing the Left Cover (middle) 0003-8291 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover (middle) [3]. F-4-60 4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) 4.7.3.1 Removing the Delivery Cover 0003-8281 F-4-62 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2].
Page 168: Expansion Bus Pcb
Chapter 4 4.7.3.5 Removing the Main 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (upper) [2]. Controller PCB (sub) 0003-5504 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB (sub) [2]. F-4-64 F-4-67 4.7.3.4 Removing 4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB Controller Box Cover...
Page 169: Removing The Delivery Cover
Chapter 4 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (upper) [2]. F-4-71 F-4-69 4.7.4.4 Removing Controller Box Cover 0003-5531 4.7.4.2 Removing the Delivery 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the controller Cover 0003-8283 box cover [2]. 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2].
Page 170: Sram Pcb
Chapter 4 4.7.4.5 Removing the SRAM 4.7.4.7 After Replacing the Board Expansion PCB 0003-5544 0003-5557 1) Release the 2 locks [1], and detach the SRAM Mount the SRAM PCB [1] removed from the existing board [2]. PCB to the newly mounted expansion bus PCB [2]. F-4-74 F-4-76 4.7.4.6...
Page 171: Removing The Controller Box Cover
Chapter 4 4.7.5.3 Removing the SRAM 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (upper) [2]. Board 0003-5538 1) Release the 2 locks [1], and detach the SRAM board [2]. F-4-78 F-4-81 4.7.5.2 Removing Controller Box Cover 0003-5537 4.7.5.4 After Replacing the 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the controller...
Page 172: Ufr Board
Chapter 4 4.7.6 UFR Board 4.7.6.2 Removing the Delivery Cover 0003-8284 4.7.6.1 Removing the Rear 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2]. Cover (upper) 0003-8314 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3].
Page 173: Ethernet Board
Chapter 4 4.7.6.4 Removing the 4.7.7 Ethernet Board Controller Box Cover 0003-5554 4.7.7.1 Removing the Rear 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the controller box cover [2]. Cover (upper) 0003-8315 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3].
Page 174: Removing The Delivery Cover
Chapter 4 4.7.7.2 Removing the Delivery Cover 0003-8285 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2]. F-4-93 F-4-91 4.7.7.3 Removing the Left Cover (middle) 0003-8294 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover (middle) [3].
Page 175: Hdd
Chapter 4 4.7.8 HDD 4.7.8.2 Removing Controller Box Cover 0003-5852 4.7.8.1 Removing the Rear 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the controller box cover [2]. Cover (upper) 0003-8317 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3].
Page 176: After Replacing The Hdd
Chapter 4 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the HD cover after a download session. [2]. B. If a Card Reader and NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Are Used A card ID used by the NSA exists on the HDD. If you have replaced the HDD, you must also download the card data used by the NSA once again;...
Page 177: Controller Fan
Chapter 4 4.7.9.2 Removing the Left system control ID No., you will not be able to register a card to the machine while using NSA. Cover (middle) 0003-8295 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 10) Download the card ID. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover Keep the machine in a standby state, and download (middle) [3].
Page 178 Chapter 4 4-46...
Page 179: Chapter 5 Original Exposure System
Chapter 5 Original Exposure System...
Page 181 Contents Contents 5.1 Construction ............................... 5 1 5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................. 5 1 5.1.2 Major Components ............................5 2 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System ......................5 4 5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB..........................5 4 5.2 Basic Sequence..............................5 6 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On ....................
Page 182 5.4.3.2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover......................5 27 5.4.3.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor Unit.................... 5 28 5.4.3.4 Removing the Reader Controller PCB....................5 28 5.4.3.5 After Replacing the Reader Controller ....................5 28 5.4.4 Interface PCB............................. 5 30 5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ...................... 5 30 5.4.4.2 Removing the Interface PCB ......................
Page 183: Construction
Chapter 5 5.1 Construction 5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0002-5096 The following shows major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the machine's original exposure system: T-5-1 Item Description Scanning lamp xenon lamp (white) scanning book mode: by moving optical unit ADF mode: by moving original Reading resolution 600 (main scanning) x 600 (sub scanning) dpi...
Page 184: Major Components
Chapter 5 5.1.2 Major Components 0002-5118 The original exposure system consists of the following major components: T-5-2 Item Notation Description Scanning lamp xenon lamp: 77.500 lx Scanner motor M501 2 phase pulse motor: pulse control Reader Cooling fan FM13 cools the reader assembly. Scanner HP sensor PS501 detects the home position of the scanner.
Page 185 Chapter 5 Image HP leading edge Stream reading position Size detection (start position) Original Copyboard glass No. 2 mirror No. 1 mirror base Original scanning lamp Lens No. 1 mirror No. 2 mirror base No. 3 mirror F-5-2 Scanner motor Light-blocking plate Scanner HP sensor...
Page 186: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 5 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0002-5128 The following shows the construction of the control system of the original exposure system: Scanner motor Scanner motor drive control To ADF Reader controller Interface To printer (main controller) CCD unit Reader cocling FAN open/closed...
Page 187 Chapter 5 T-5-3 Jack No Description J201 used for the power from the machine (printer unit). J202 used for the power from the machine (printer unit). J203 used for communications with the printer unit (connection with the scanner motor). used for communications with the ADF (image signal input). J204 used for connection with the CCD unit.
Page 188: Basic Sequence
Chapter 5 5.2 Basic Sequence 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 0002-5131 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On SREADY STBY STBY shift shading Forward Forward Reverse Reverse fixed shading Reader motor white plate dust detection control shading correction Original scanning lamp HP sensor Scanner unit position...
Page 189: Basic Sequence Of Operation In Response To A Press On The Start Key
Chapter 5 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start 0002-5136 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original) Start key STBY SREADY SCFW SCRW STBY Forward Reverse Reverse...
Page 190 Chapter 5 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original) Start key Not executed if 1 min or less (power off) from previous session. SCRW SCFW STBY STBY SREADY Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward...
Page 191: Various Control
Chapter 5 5.3 Various Control 5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System 5.3.1.1 Overview 0002-5137 The following shows the arrangement of the components associated with the drive of the scanner: Reader Interface drive Scanner motor Light-blocking plate forward Scanning lamp reverse Scanner HP sensor No.
Page 192 Chapter 5 Reader controller Interface PCB Scanner +24V/15V J202 J308 motor J306 J203 J307 M501 Motor driver 1 Scanner motor control signal F-5-13 a. Moving the Scanner in Reverse After an Image Scan After an image scan, the No. 1 mirror base is moved in reverse to shading position at 234 mm/sec regardless of the selected color mode.
Page 193: Enlargement/Reduction
Chapter 5 5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction 5.3.2.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction 0002-5139 For main scanning direction in both copyboard and ADF modes, the image is read at 100%, and the magnification is varied by the main controller block. 5.3.2.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction 0002-5140 For sub scanning direction in both copyboard and ADF modes, the image is read at 100%, and the magnification is changed by the main controller block.
Page 194: Detecting The Size Of Originals
Chapter 5 5.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp 0004-1095 The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp, which uses xenon gas sealed inside. On the outside of the glass tube, 2 electrodes are arranged in parallel with the tube; the inside of the tube, on the other hand, is coated with fluorescent material.
Page 195 Chapter 5 5.3.4.2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification 0002-5150 For main scanning direction, the machine moves the No. 1 mirror base to the following points in relation to the location of the original to measure the levels of the CCD. For sub scanning direction, the machine checks the states of the sensors arranged as follows: AB-Configuration Inch-configuration...
Page 196 Chapter 5 Note: 1.Changes in the Signal (from ADF open to close) change: no other: yes The machine uses OR combinations for identification. 2.Priority on the Front Sensors When checking the measurements for main scanning direction, if the absence of an original is indicated at the rear while the presence of an original is indicated at the front, the machine will give priority to the indication at the front (i.e., presence of an original).
Page 197: Overview Of Operation
Chapter 5 5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation 0002-5153 1. Standby No.1 mirror base: shading position xenon lamp: off original sensor: off Xenon lamp Original sensor Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2 Copyboard Point of detection 3 glass Reader unit Point of detection 4 Original detection position F-5-20...
Page 198: Dirt Sensor Control
Chapter 5 4. ADF Cover Fully Closed (5 deg or less). The machine checks for a change in the output levels of the sensors for 2 sec after the ADF open/closed sensor has identified the ADF as being "closed"; the machine assumes the absence of an original at points without a change. The machine then identifies the size of the original based on the combination of changes at 5 points.
Page 199 Chapter 5 <Timing of Detection> <1> at the end of a job <2>between sheets (for every sheet read) Start key SCAN SCAN Dust detection* Dust detection Dust detection F-5-27 *Executed only if dust has been detected at all points, i.e., A, B, C, D, and E in the previous job. If so, the machine uses the point with least dust as the reading position and executes dust correction before starting reading operation.
Page 200: White Plate Dust Detection Control
Chapter 5 If it finds dust at all 5 points (A, B, C, D, E), then it will indicate an alarm when an original is placed in the ADF, prompting the user for cleaning. To reset, press [close]. When it starts a job, it will run the session once again and use a point with no dust or little dust as the reading position. *1: reading position at the end of the previous job.
Page 201 Chapter 5 <Particulars of Control> White Plate Dust Detection The machine compares the shading coefficient obtained from shift shading and the shading coefficient obtained from fixed shading to identify the presence/absence of dust and, if any, coordinates and width of the area. White Plate Dust Correction If the machine detects dust as a result of white plate dust detection, it corrects the shading coefficient of the area using the shading coefficient of both sides so as to decrease the effects of the presence of dust.
Page 202: Image Processing
Chapter 5 5.3.6 Image Processing 5.3.6.1 Overview 0002-5161 The following shows the major functions of the machine' s image processing system: 1. CCD (image sensor) number of lines: 3 (RGB, 1 line each) number of pixels: 7350 size of pixel: 9.3 x 9.3 ym 2.
Page 203: Ccd Drive
Chapter 5 2. Digital Image Processing Reader controller PCB J101 J204 Gain correction EEP-ROM data Target value SRAM CCD/AP J205 J102 J203 Digital image Digital image signal signal Shading correction F-5-33 5.3.6.2 CCD Drive 0002-5168 The machine's CCD is a linear image sensor consisting of 3 lines (R, G, B, 1 line each), each line composed of 7350 photo cells.
Page 204: Shading Adjustment
Chapter 5 5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment 0002-5186 The machine executes shading adjustment in response to a command made in service mode. The machine measures the density of blank white paper and that of the white plate to obtain density data; it then computes the data to produce the target value for use at time of shading correction.
Page 205: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 5 5.4 Parts Replacement 5.4.2 Exposure Lamp Procedure 5.4.2.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0003-5445 5.4.1 Copyboard Glass 1) Open the ADF. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass 5.4.1.1 Removing Copyboard retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3]. Glass 0003-3121 1) Open the ADF.
Page 206 Chapter 5 5.4.2.3 Removing the Reader 5.4.2.5 Removing the Reader Right Cover Left Cover 0003-8065 0003-8228 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader left right cover [2]. cover [2].
Page 207: Removing The Reader Rear Cover
Chapter 5 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [2]. F-5-43 2) Detach the reader front cover [1] in upward F-5-46 direction [1]. 4) Bend up the edge of the rubber cover [1], and remove the screws (2 pc. each) [2]; then, detach the angle guide plate.
Page 208: Removing The Ccd Unit Cover
Chapter 5 5) Open the ADF fully. 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the reader rear cover [2] toward the rear to detach. Take care not to damage the ADF open/closed sensor arm [3]. F-5-51 5.4.2.9 Removing the Scanning Lamp 0003-3135 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable [2]...
Page 209: Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 5 5.4.3 Reader Controller PCB 2) Slide the No. 1 mirror base [1] to the right to match it against the cut off [2] of the frame. When sliding the No. 1 mirror base, be sure to 5.4.3.1 Removing the hold it by the cut up tab [A] of the mirror stay.
Page 210: Removing The Original Size Sensor Unit
Chapter 5 5.4.3.4 Removing the Reader Controller PCB 0003-3122 1) Disconnect the 5 flat cables [1] and the connector [2] then, remove the 4 screws [3], and detach the reader controller PCB [4]. F-5-57 5.4.3.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor Unit 0003-5466 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the original size detection unit [2].
Page 211 Chapter 5 <Initializing the RAM of the Reader Controller COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ XY>ADJ S Without Replacing the PCB> b 4 feeder mode main scanning position adjustment Using the SST, upload the backup data of the reader COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ XY>ADJ Y DF controller; after you have initialized the RAM, b 5 ADF stream reading CCD read position download the backup data, thereby eliminating the adjustment...
Page 212: Interface Pcb
Chapter 5 When done, put the P PRINT printout [1] in the service book case, disposing of the previous printout. F-5-63 F-5-65 5.4.4 Interface PCB 4) Bend up the edge of the rubber cover [1], and 5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader remove the screws (2 pc.
Page 213: Removing The Interface Pcb
Chapter 5 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the reader rear cover [2] toward the rear to detach. Take care not to damage the ADF open/closed sensor arm [3]. F-5-70 How to Disconnect the Flat Cable Slide the locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and disconnect the flat cable [2].
Page 214: Inverter Pcb
Chapter 5 5.4.4.3 Points to Note When When detaching the copyboard glass, take care not Mounting the Interface PCB 0004-7789 to touch the white plate attached to its back. (Soiling can cause lines in the image). If soiled, clean it using If the tie wrap [1] of the scanner motor harness is lint free paper moistened with alcohol.) closer to the motor than the wire guide [2], the harness...
Page 215: Ccd Unit
Chapter 5 5.4.5.3 Removing the Inverter When detaching the copyboard glass, take care not 0003-3125 to touch the white plate attached to its back. (Soiling can cause lines in the image). If soiled, clean it using 1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the flat cable [2]; lint free paper moistened with alcohol.) then, remove the 3 screws, free the 2 PCB supports [4], and detach the inverter PCB [5].
Page 216: Original Size Detection
Chapter 5 5.4.6.3 Original Size Detection Unit 0003-5469 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the original size detection unit [2]. F-5-83 2) Disconnect the 2 flat cables [1] from the reader controller PCB; then, remove the 2 screws [2], detach the 2 leaf springs [3], and detach the CCD unit [4].
Page 217: Scanner Motor
Chapter 5 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU GB 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. (to enter the correction value for CCD dependent GB 3) Remove the 2 screws [2]. color displacement in sub scanning direction) +2,-1,30524101 CCDU-GB CCDU-RG F-5-87 F-5-85 4) Bend up the edge of the rubber cover [1], and remove the screws (2 pc.
Page 218: Removing The Scanner Motor
Chapter 5 5) Open the ADF fully. 2) Detach the 2 harness retainers [2] from the back of 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the reader rear the cover [1] to free the cover. cover [2] toward the rear to detach. Take care not to damage the ADF open/closed sensor arm [3].
Page 219: Adf Open/Close Sensor
Chapter 5 5.4.7.3 Mounting the Scanner Motor 0003-3131 When mounting the scanner motor, be sure that the timing belt [3] is securely attached to the scanner pulley [1] and the motor shaft [2]. F-5-97 5.4.8 ADF Open/Close Sensor 5.4.8.1 Removing the Reader F-5-95 Rear Cover 0004-5163...
Page 220: Removing The Adf Open/Closed Sensor
Chapter 5 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 5) Open the ADF fully. 3) Remove the 2 screws [2]. 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the reader rear cover [2] toward the rear to detach. Take care not to damage the ADF open/closed sensor arm [3].
Page 221: Scanner Hp Sensor
Chapter 5 5.4.9 Scanner HP Sensor 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the reinforcing plate [2]. 5.4.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0004-4318 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. F-5-104 3) Free the hook [1], and detach the ADF open/closed sensor (1, 2).
Page 222: Removing The Mirror Base Home Position Sensor
Chapter 5 5.4.9.2 Removing the Mirror 4) Bend up the edge of the rubber cover [1], and remove the screws (2 pc. each) [2]; then, detach the Base Home Position Sensor 0003-3128 angle guide plate. 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the plate [2]. F-5-108 F-5-111 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor...
Page 223: Original Sensor
Chapter 5 5.4.10 Original Sensor 5.4.10.1 Removing Copyboard Glass 0003-3146 1) Open the ADF. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3]. F-5-116 5.4.10.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor Unit 0003-3136 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the original size detection unit [2].
Page 224: Cooling Fan
Chapter 5 5.4.10.4 Removing the Original 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [2]. Size Sensor 0003-5464 1) While freeing the claw at the edge, detach the original size sensor [1]. F-5-119 F-5-121 5.4.11 Cooling Fan 4) Bend up the edge of the rubber cover [1], and 5.4.11.1 Removing the Reader remove the screws (2 pc.
Page 225: Scanner Drive Cable
Chapter 5 5.4.12 Scanner Drive Cable 5) Open the ADF fully. 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and slide the reader rear cover [2] toward the rear to detach. 5.4.12.1 Outline 0004-1353 Take care not to damage the ADF open/closed Be sure to keep the following on hand when replacing sensor arm [3].
Page 226: Removing The Right Cover (Upper)
Chapter 5 5.4.12.3 Removing the Right 5.4.12.5 Removing the Left Cover (upper) Cover (upper) 0004-1356 0004-1359 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the left cover (upper) [2]. (upper) [2].
Page 227: Removing The Adf
Chapter 5 5.4.12.7 Removing the Reader 5.4.12.8 Removing the ADF 0004-1376 Front Cover 0004-1361 1) Disconnect the communications cable [1] of the ADF from the host machine. 1) Remove the screw [2] (1 pc. each) from the left and right of the reader front cover [1]. F-5-134 2) Bend up the edge of the rubber cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2];...
Page 228: Removing The Control Panel
Chapter 5 3) Remove the 3 knurled screws [1], and slide the machine toward the front, and lift it to detach. F-5-136 5.4.12.9 Removing the Control F-5-139 Panel 0004-1423 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. F-5-140 F-5-137 2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the control panel [2] together with the cover.
Page 229: Removing The Scanner Drive Cable
Chapter 5 5.4.12.10 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable 0004-1362 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reading glass retainer [2]. When removing the reading glass retainer, take care so that the leaf spring will not come off. 2) Remove the reading glass [3]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the left glass retainer [5].
Page 230 Chapter 5 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the ADF right 7) Disconnect the 9 connectors [1], and remove the 5 screw cover [2]. screws [2]; then, detach the interface PCB [3] together with its base. F-5-144 5) Remove the screw[1], and detach the ADF left F-5-147 screw cover [2].
Page 231 Chapter 5 11) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1], and 14) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1], and remove the 6 screws [2]; then, detach the motor frame remove the 6 screws [2]; then, detach the ADF open/ [3].
Page 232: Fitting The Scanner Drive Cable
Chapter 5 16) Remove the 2 cable fixing screws [2] of the No. 1 mirror base [1]. 17) Remove the spring [3] used to hold the cable in place. 18) Free the 2 hooks of the cable from the right side of the reader frame.
Page 233: Adjusting The Position Of The No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base
Chapter 5 5.4.12.12 Adjusting the Position of 2) Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2]; rear [3]) of the mirror positioning tool into the holes the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base 0004-1439 [1] of the No. 1 mirror base, No. 2 mirror base, and 1) Set the pins at the rear of the mirror positioning tool rail.
Page 234 Chapter 5 5-52...
Page 235: Chapter 6 Laser Exposure
Chapter 6 Laser Exposure...
Page 237 Contents Contents 6.1 Construction ............................... 6 1 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................. 6 1 6.1.2 Major Components ............................6 2 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ......................6 3 6.2 Basic Sequence..............................6 4 6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation ........................6 4 6.3 Various Control ..............................
Page 239: Construction
Chapter 6 6.1 Construction 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0002-9823 T-6-1 Laser Light Wave length 645 to 665 mm (visible light) Output 35mW Number of beams T-6-2 Laser Scanner Motor Type of motor DC brushless Revolution 32000 rpm (approx.) Type of bearing T-6-3 Polygon Mirror...
Page 240: Major Components
Chapter 6 6.1.2 Major Components 0002-9832 T-6-5 Item Description Laser unit emits laser light. Polygon mirror scans laser light in main scanning direction. BD mirror reflects laser light, directing it to the BD PCB. BD PCB generates the BD signal. Laser mirror 1 reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum.
Page 241: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 6 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0002-9842 The machine uses ASIC1 (IC29) on its DC controller PCB to control the laser exposure system. ASIC1 (IC29) uses the video signals coming from the main controller PCB to form a latent static image on the photosensitive drum through the following 6 control mechanisms: DC-CON ASIC(IC29)
Page 242: Basic Sequence
Chapter 6 6.2 Basic Sequence 6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation 0002-9844 The following shows the basic sequence of operation of the laser exposure system: 1) the Start key is pressed or the print request signal arrives from the main controller PCB. 2) the DC controller PCB executes a control mechanism so that the laser scanner 3) rotates at the target speed;...
Page 243: Various Control
Chapter 6 6.3 Various Control 6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing 6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit 0002-9846 The laser unit is turned on or off by the laser driver PCB in response to the laser control signal (CONT0/CNT1) coming from the DC controller PCB.
Page 244: Controlling The Synchronization In Main Scanning Direction
Chapter 6 6.3.1.2 Controlling the Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction 0002-9852 The machine controls the synchronization in main scanning direction to mach the write start position in main scanning direction, and the control is executed by the BD sync control circuit found in ASIC1, which serves to generate the sync signal for main scanning direction used by the DC controller PCB based on the BD signal coming from the BD PCB.
Page 245: Controlling The Synchronization In Sub Scanning Direction
Chapter 6 6.3.1.3 Controlling the Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction 0002-9854 The machine controls the synchronization in sub scanning direction to match the write start position of each image to be formed on the ITB in full color mode. This control mechanism is executed by the sub scanning sync control circuit of ASIC1, which uses the ITB home position signal (ITBHP) generated by the ITB home position sensor to generate the synch signal (PVREQ) for sub scanning direction.
Page 246: Controlling The Intensity Of Laser Light
Chapter 6 6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6.3.2.1 APC Control 0002-9878 The machine uses APC control to make sure that the intensity of laser light remains at a specific level by controlling the output of the laser diode of the laser driver. For the control, the machine causes the DC controller to send the laser control signal (CNT0=1, CNT1=0) to the laser drive IC on the laser driver PCB.
Page 247: Controlling The Laser Scanner Motor
Chapter 6 6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 0002-9881 The machine controls the laser scanner motor so that the motor rotates at a specific speed using its motor speed control mechanism and reference signal generation mechanism found inside the DC controller PCB. The motor speed control mechanism detects the speed detection signal (FG, BD), and compares it against the reference signal generated by the reference signal generation mechanism, thereby controlling the acceleration signal (ACC) and the deceleration signal (DECK) to make sure that the motor rotates at a specific speed.
Page 248: Controlling The Laser Shutter
Chapter 6 6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 0002-9882 The machine is equipped with a mechanism to protect against exposure of its inside by laser light when the black toner assembly is opened. When the black toner hopper assembly is opened, the protrusion found on the hopper assembly releases the laser shutter, causing the laser shutter to close so that the laser path is closed.
Page 249: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 6 6.4 Parts Replacement 6.4.1.3 Removing the Left Cover (middle) 0003-8367 Procedure 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover 6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit (middle) [3]. 6.4.1.1 Removing the Left Cover (upper) 0003-8365 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the left cover (upper) [2].
Page 250: Removing The Laser Scanner Unit
Chapter 6 6.4.1.5 Removing the Laser 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cooling fan [2] together with its base. Scanner Unit 0003-8369 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and open the wire guide [2]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the 2 locking plates [4].
Page 251: Points To Note When Replacing The Laser Scanner Unit
Chapter 6 6) While lifting the area [A], slide out the laser Moreover, the actuator [1] of the laser shutter is scanner unit [1] slightly. mounted to the hopper assembly. 7) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2], and detach the laser scanner unit [1]. F-6-22 Be sure to keep the hopper assembly open when fitting F-6-20...
Page 252 Chapter 6 2) Open the front cover. 4) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) By pulling the grip [1] toward the front, fully open 5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process the manual feed cover [2]. unit cover [2]. F-6-24 F-6-26 6) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the...
Page 253 Chapter 6 9) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front 13) Remove the 3 screws [1]. cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. F-6-32 14) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. F-6-29 10) Close the right deck.
Page 254 Chapter 6 16) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] from the upper 19) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the right. shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from the back of the cover. F-6-38 20) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the F-6-35 drum fixing member [2] of the drum shaft [1], remove the fixing screw [4].
Page 255 Chapter 6 22) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8). 25) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2]. F-6-41 23) Shift down the fixing/feeding releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 256 Chapter 6 27) Remove the screw [1], and fully open the upper 32) While holding the mirror cleaning tool [1] as right cover [2]. shown, insert it into the slit [2]. F-6-46 F-6-49 28) Remove the screw [1], and detach the filter retainer [2] and the filter [3].
Page 257: Chapter 7 Image Formation
Chapter 7 Image Formation...
Page 259 Contents Contents 7.1 Construction ............................... 7 1 7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System................... 7 1 7.1.2 Major Components ............................7 4 7.1.3 Charging System ............................7 5 7.2 Image Formation Process ........................... 7 7 7.2.1 Image Formation Process ..........................7 7 7.3 Basic Sequence..............................
Page 260 7.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning ......................... 7 65 7.9.1 Overview of the Drum Cleaning Unit ....................... 7 65 7.9.2 Controlling the Drum Cleaning Unit Drive Mechanism ................7 66 7.10 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism ......................7 67 7.10.1 Collection of Waste Toner........................7 67 7.10.2 Detecting the State of the Waste Toner Bottle (full) ................
Page 261 Contents 7.11.8.5 Removing the Transfer Charging Drive Assembly ................7 98 7.11.8.6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit..................7 99 7.11.8.7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..............7 100 7.11.8.8 Sliding Out the Process Unit ......................7 101 7.11.8.9 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly...................
Page 262 Contents 7.11.12.4 Sliding Out the Process Unit......................7 138 7.11.12.5 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly ................. 7 141 7.11.12.6 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit..............7 141 7.11.12.7 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade ..............7 142 7.11.12.8 Points to Note When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade ......... 7 142 7.11.13 Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper..................
Page 263 Contents 7.11.20 Black Developing Clutch ........................7 186 7.11.20.1 Remove the Rear Cover (upper)....................7 186 7.11.20.2 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)..................7 186 7.11.20.3 Sliding the DC Controller Box ..................... 7 186 7.11.20.4 Removing the DC Controller Box....................7 187 7.11.20.5 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller Box ..............
Page 264 Contents 7.11.27 Intermediate Transfer Unit ........................7 214 7.11.27.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) ....................7 214 7.11.27.2 Releasing the Front Cover ......................7 214 7.11.27.3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly....................7 215 7.11.27.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly................7 216 7.11.27.5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly.................7 216 7.11.27.6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................
Page 265 Contents 7.11.33.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder............7 241 7.11.33.3 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller ..................7 242 7.11.34 ITB Cleaning Blade..........................7 242 7.11.34.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) ....................7 242 7.11.34.2 Releasing the Front Cover ......................7 242 7.11.34.3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly ....................
Page 266 Contents 7.11.40 Patch Image Sensor..........................7 274 7.11.40.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) ....................7 274 7.11.40.2 Releasing the Front Cover ......................7 275 7.11.40.3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly....................7 276 7.11.40.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly................7 276 7.11.40.5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly.................7 277 7.11.40.6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..................
Page 267: Construction
Chapter 7 7.1 Construction 7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System 0002-9938 T-7-1 Drum Unit Photosensitive drum Type of drum A Si Diameter of drum 84 mm Cleaning mechanism by blade (in contact) Speed of process 276 mm/sec T-7-2 Primary Charging Assembly Method of charging by corona Method of cleaning...
Page 268 Chapter 7 Mono Color Developing Assembly T-7-5 Color Developing Assembly Diameter of developing cylinder 20 mm Method of development dry, 2 component Toner non magnetic, negative Toner level detection inside developing assembly T-7-6 Toner Cartridge Toner level detection (mono color) by piezoelectric oscillator sensor Toner level detection (color) by optical sensor...
Page 269 Chapter 7 T-7-8 Feed speed Mode Paper type 276 mm/sec mono color plain paper, transparency color plain paper 184 mm/sec color heavy paper 1 (105 to 163 g) 92 mm/sec color heavy paper 2 (163 g or more), transparency T-7-9 Pre Transfer Charging Assembly Method of charging by corona...
Page 270: Major Components
Chapter 7 7.1.2 Major Components 0003-1029 The following shows the major components associated with the machine' s image formation system: [15] [16] [17] [14] [18] [13] [12] [11] [10] [19] F-7-1 1 Photosensitive drum 2 Primary charging assembly 3 Pre exposure LED 4 Drum cleaner assembly 5 ITB unit 6 Pre transfer charging assembly...
Page 271: Charging System
Chapter 7 7.1.3 Charging System 0003-1030 Primary Charging Bias method of charging: by corona target of charging: primary charging wire DC bias level: 6.5kV (1400yA) Grid Bias method of charging: by corona target of charging: grid wire DC bias level: 800V Color Developing Bias method of charging: by roller target of charging: color developing cylinder...
Page 272 Chapter 7 F-7-2 DC bias level: 3.0 kV (cleaning is 3.0kV) 1 Pre transfer charging wire 2 Color developing cylinder 3 Stray toner collection roller 4 Black developing cylinder 5 Primary charging wire 6 Grid wire 7 Primary transfer static eliminator 8 Primary transfer roller 9 Secondary transfer outside roller...
Page 273: Image Formation Process
Chapter 7 7.2 Image Formation Process 7.2.1 Image Formation Process 0003-1031 1. Latent Static Image Formation Block This block consists of 3 steps, at the end of which a latent static image is formed on the photosensitive drum. Step 1 (pre exposure) [1] In preparation for primary charging, the pre exposure LED shines light on the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove the residual charges from the surface, thus preventing uneven density.
Page 274 Chapter 7 6. Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block Step 11 (drum cleaning) [11] The residual toner is removed from the photosensitive drum by way of cleaning the photosensitive drum. 1. Static Image Formation Block 2. Developing Block Photosensitive 6. Photosensitive drum Drum Cleaning [11] Block...
Page 275: Basic Sequence
Chapter 7 7.3 Basic Sequence 7.3.1 At Time of Power On 0004-7867 The main power switch is pressed while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is lower than 100 deg C (i.e., the main power switch is pressed after the machine has been left alone for a long time, such as in the morning). <Characteristics>...
Page 276: During Copying/Printing (Normal Speed)
Chapter 7 7.3.2 During Copying/Printing (normal speed) 0005-5911 Full color, Plain paper, A4, 1 Copy/Print <Characteristics> While an image is being formed on the intermediate transfer belt, the machine keeps the ITB cleaning blade and the secondary outside roller away from the belt. Start key PSTBY PINTR...
Page 277: Image Stabilization Control
Chapter 7 7.4 Image Stabilization Control 7.4.1 Overview of Image Stabilization Control 0003-2128 The machine is designed to execute the following control mechanisms to be sure of stable image production in the presence of changes in the site environment and deterioration of components associated with image formation over the product life.
Page 278: Timing Of Image Stabilization Control
Chapter 7 T-7-11 Item Description 1 Dmax control determines the best Color developing bias. 2 ATR control determines toner supply amounts. 3 ATVC control determines the best transfer bias level. 4 Potential control determines the best transfer bias level. 5 Dhalf control determines the best gradation table (printer).
Page 279: Atvc Control
Chapter 7 In Response to a Press on the Start Key (mono color) The control lasts about 6 sec. Start key PRINT STBY INTR LSTR Mono color print (for every 240 prints) Primary transfer ATVC control Secondary transfer Primary transfer ATVC control ATVC control Secondary transfer...
Page 280 Chapter 7 Jam recovery The control lasts a maximum of about 100 sec. Jam recovery STBY WMUPR Primary transfer Potential D-max control D-harf control control ATVC control Secondary transfer ATVC control F-7-11 *1: The machine executes this control mechanism when the temperature of the fixing upper roller is less than 100 deg C.
Page 281: Potential Control
Chapter 7 7.4.3 Potential Control 0003-7609 The machine is designed to execute potential control to be sure of stable printing in the presence of drops in the sensitivity of the photosensitive drum or changes in the environment. <Conditions of Execution> when the power is turned on/when the toner cartridge is replaced (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) after jam recovery/after return from a sleep state (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than...
Page 282 Chapter 7 1 Potential control PCB 2 Laser driver PCB 3 Environment sensor 4 Pre exposure LED 5 Grid wire 6 Primary charging wire 7 Potential sensor 8 Black developing cylinder 9 Color developing cylinder <Particulars of Control> 1. Drum Dark Area Potential Control (VD) The machine decides on a grid bias (Vg) with the aim of obtaining the best dark area potential (VD) at various points of development (black developing cylinder position, color cylinder position) for the photosensitive drum.
Page 283 Chapter 7 2. Drum Light Area Potential (VL) Control The machine decides on a laser output level to obtain the best light area potential (VL) for various points of development (developing cylinder position, color cylinder position) for the photosensitive drum. T-7-13 Order Item...
Page 284 Chapter 7 Control of No.4 to 5 VL-LP Curve (sensor position) VL-LP Curve (Bk cylinder position) Target VL-LP Curve VL(Bk) (color cylinder position) Target VL(Color) Laser power F-7-16 7-18...
Page 285: Atvc Control
Chapter 7 7.4.4 ATVC Control 0003-7610 The machine executes ATVC control to determine the best transfer voltage when transferring toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB and from the ITB to paper. This control may be of 2 types: primary transfer ATVC and secondary transfer ATVC.
Page 286 Chapter 7 1. Primary Transfer ATVC In primary transfer ATVC, the machine determines the primary transfer voltage so the target transfer current may be obtained at time of transfer. <Conditions of Execution> when the power is turned on/when the toner cartridge is replaced (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) after jam recovery/after return from a sleep state (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C)
Page 287: Atr Control
Chapter 7 <Particulars of Control> T-7-15 Order Item Description application of secondary applies a specific level of bias to the secondary transfer transfer bias roller; then, uses HVT3 to detect the level of current and feeds the data back to the DC controller. monitoring of the uses the DC controller to compute the correction value environment sensor...
Page 288 Chapter 7 DC-CON J1109A F-7-18 1 Video count 2 Result of detection by patch image read sensor 3 Result of detection by ATR sensor PS4: ATR sensor PS2: patch image read sensor DC CON: DC controller MN CON: main controller E020 xx10: the SGNL value for INIT control is lower than 62.
Page 289 Chapter 7 E020 xx92: the result of computation by patch reading for patch detection is lower than 42 for 3 times continuously. E020 xx93: the result of computation by patch reading for patch detection is 522 or higher for 3 times continuously. E020 xxA0: the SGNL value for ATR control is lower than 62.
Page 290: Acr Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control)
Chapter 7 7.4.6 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control) 0004-9234 The machine's ACR control is designed to prolong the life of the color developing assemblies by feeding the developing assemblies with a fresh supply of toner (mix of resin dye and magnetic iron) while discharging deteriorating carrier from the assemblies.
Page 291: D Max Control
Chapter 7 7.4.7 D max Control 0003-7060 The machine executes D max (image density correction) control so as to limit fluctuations in the image density caused by changes in the environment or deterioration of the photosensitive drum or of toner. The machine uses the DC controller of the printer unit for the control.
Page 292: D Half Control
Chapter 7 PS2: patch image sensor DC CON: DC controller <Flow of Operations> The following shows the flow of operations executed under this control: Starts up Creates a patch pattern Reads the patches EX: D-max Correction Table for M M4 M5 DC controller Creates a D-max correction table (M, Y, C) DC controller...
Page 293 Chapter 7 MN-CON Patch pattern data Density data output input DC-CON F-7-22 PS2: patch image read sensor DC CON: DC controller MN CON: main controller <Flow of Operation> The following shows the flow of operation that takes place during the control: 7-27...
Page 294 Chapter 7 Starts up Main controller Generates patch pattern data Creates patch patterns EX: D-max Correction Table for M Reads the patches Actual gradation characteristics M9 M10 DC controller Generates density data Main controller image characteristics Creates a D-half correction table (M, Y, C) density data (MN-CON) F-7-23 7-28...
Page 295: Pascal Control
Chapter 7 7.4.9 PASCAL control 0003-9817 The machine is designed to execute PASCAL control (image characteristics correction control) to enable the reproduction of ideal image characteristics, and the execution involves the reader unit mechanisms. The machine uses the main controller of the printer unit for the control. The printer uses the data stored in the main controller to generate 3 types of test patterns *1;...
Page 296 Chapter 7 NM CON: main controller <Flow of Operation> The following shows the flow of operation that takes place during the control: Start-up Printer unit The main controller generates test patterns (3 types). The user/service person places the printouts of the test patterns in the reader unit one after another.
Page 297 Chapter 7 *1: Differences Among 3 Test Patterns Test Print 1 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of error diffusion processing, which is not subject to moire and, therefore, used in text/photo/map, print photo, and text mode. Test Print 2 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a low num ber of lines, which is suitable for the expression of gradation and, there fore, is used for print film photo mode and when priority is placed on PDL.
Page 298: Charging Meachanism
Chapter 7 7.5 Charging Meachanism 7.5.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias 0003-1034 The primary charging bias is used to charge the surface of the photosensitive drum to a positive potential by way of preparing it for image formation. The primary charging bias may be either of 2 types of biases: primary charging DC bias, grid DC bias. The bias is generated by the high voltage PCB 1 in response to a command from the DC controller, and is applied to the primary charging wire or the grid wire.
Page 299: Controlling The Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism
Chapter 7 7.5.2 Controlling the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism 0003-1035 The machine is equipped with a mechanism to clean the charging wire with the aim of preventing soiling of the wire inside the primary charging assembly. The primary charging wire cleaner motor (M26) is rotated in normal and reverse directions to turn the cleaner screw, causing the wire cleaner to move to the front or the rear for cleaning of the charging wire.
Page 300: Controlling The Pre Transfer Charging Bias
Chapter 7 7.5.3 Controlling the Pre Transfer Charging Bias 0003-1038 The pre transfer charging bias is used to even out the potential of the toner layers formed on the ITB, and it is applied to the toner on the photosensitive drum when black toner is developed. The pre transfer charging bias may be either of 2 types of biases: pre transfer charging DC bias, pre transfer charging AC bias.
Page 301 Chapter 7 The relationship between the drive signal generated by the DC controller and the cleaning operation is as follows: when POST_CLN_MTR0 is '0', the wire cleaner moves to the rear. when POST_CLN_MTR0 is '1', the wire cleaner moves to the front. J1108-A11 POST_CLN_MTR0 DC-CON...
Page 302: Pre Exposure Led
Chapter 7 7.5.5 Pre Exposure LED 0003-1043 The machine uses a pre exposure LED array to remove charges remaining on the photosensitive drum, thus preventing uneven density in prints.The pre exposure LED array is arranged opposite the photosensitive drum, and the LEDs are turned on during printing to remove residual changes from the drum surface and forming stable images.
Page 303: Developing Rotary
Chapter 7 7.6 Developing Rotary 7.6.1 Overview of the Developing Rotary 0003-1164 The developing rotary serves to position a color developing assembly to a specific point. Housed inside the rotary are 3 types of color developing assemblies (M, Y, C) and color toner cartridges (M, Y, C). When printing occurs, the developing rotary motor (M5) rotates to turn the rotary counterclockwise so that one of the 3 color developing assemblies will come face to face with the photosensitive drum in sequence.
Page 304: Controlling The Developing Rotary
Chapter 7 7.6.2 Controlling the Developing Rotary 0003-1167 The machine positions the color developing assemblies (M, Y, C) and the color toner cartridges (M, Y, C) housed inside the developing rotary at a specific point at specific times.The DC controller uses the developing rotary home position sensor (PS19) to monitor the position of the rotary, turning on and off the developing rotary motor (M5) to move the rotary.
Page 305 Chapter 7 If a color developing cylinder was allowed to remain in contact with the sensitive drum at time of black development, the cylinder would disturb the black toner image. To prevent such disturbance, the machine moves the developing rotary to its home position so that a color developing cylinder will never be opposite the photosensitive drum. The following shows the position of Y toner cartridge access and point of M development.
Page 306 Chapter 7 The following shows the sequence of operation of the developing rotary when printing takes place: Timing of Operation (developing rotary; full color) Start key STBY INTR PRINT LSTR Developing rotary motor (M5) Rotary HP sensor (PS8) Developing rotary Solenoid (SL10) Develpping rotary SL sensor (PS19)
Page 307: Developing Unit
Chapter 7 7.7 Developing Unit 7.7.1 Construction of the Color Developing Assembly 0003-1050 The machine uses 3 types of color developing assemblies (M, Y, C), all housed inside the developing rotary. These color developing assemblies are of the same construction, the only difference being the color of toner (dye) supplied by individual toner cartridges.
Page 308: Controlling The Color Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism
Chapter 7 7.7.2 Controlling the Color Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism 0003-1110 The color developing assembly mainly consists of the developing cylinder, toner stirring screw A, and toner stirring screw B. These loads are driven when the color developing clutch (CL1) goes on, and are designed so that they go on only when development takes place.
Page 309: Controlling The Color Developing Bias
Chapter 7 7.7.3 Controlling the Color Developing Bias 0003-1113 The color developing bias is generated to enable depositing of color toner over the latent static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum. The color developing bias may be either of 2 types of biases: color developing DC bias, color developing AC bias. These biases are generated by the high voltage PCB 2 in response to a command from the DC controller, and are applied to the color developing cylinder at specific timing.
Page 310: Color Toner Supply
Chapter 7 7.7.4 Color Toner Supply 0003-6236 The color toner is sent to the color toner developing assembly from the color toner cartridge by way of the buffer assembly. The supply path consists of 2 segments: the path in the buffer assembly and the path to the color developing assembly.
Page 311: Detecting The Level Of Color Toner
Chapter 7 7.7.5 Detecting the Level of Color Toner 0003-1118 The machine is equipped with 2 types of detection mechanism to monitor the level of color toner: 1. based on the reading of the video counter 2. based on the state of the scanner sensor Detection by the Reading of the Video Counter The machine computes the amount of toner consumption for individual colors based on the video data coming from the main controller, and uses the result to find out the level of toner remaining inside the color developing assembly.
Page 312 Chapter 7 The following shows the timing of detection: CL_TNR_SNS_ON CL_TNR_REMAIN DC-CON PS25 PS25 <Much Toner Left> <Little Toner Left> F-7-41 1 Toner cartridge 2 Light emitting segment 3 Light receiving segment 4 Light guide 5 Toner PS25: color toner level sensor DC CON: DC controller 7-46...
Page 313 Chapter 7 <Little Toner Left> Detection starts 1 cycle 1 cycle Light emitting segent PS25 Light receiving segent Counter1(*1) Counter2(*2) <Much Toner Left> Detection starts 1 cycle 1 cycle Light emitting segent PS25 Light receiving segent Counter1(*1) Counter2(*2) F-7-42 *1: if the light receiving segment of PS25 receives light, '1'. *2: if the state of counter 1 is '1' as many as 4 times during a single cycle (5 lighting operations), '1'.
Page 314: Construction Of The Black Developing Assembly
Chapter 7 7.7.6 Construction of the Black Developing Assembly 0003-1147 The black developing assembly is found outside the developing rotary, and is held opposite the photosensitive drum at all times. The toner supplied to the black developing assembly is fed from the hopper assembly. The following shows the construction and the functions of the black developing assembly: F-7-43 T-7-17...
Page 315: Controlling The Black Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism
Chapter 7 7.7.7 Controlling the Black Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism 0003-1152 The black developing assembly consists of 5 components in terms of drive loads, which are driven when the development motor (M3) and the black developing clutch (CL3) go on. DC-CON J1109A F-7-44...
Page 316: Black Toner Supply
Chapter 7 7.7.8 Black Toner Supply 0003-1154 Black toner is supplied to the black toner developing assembly from the black toner cartridge by way of the hopper assembly, which plays the major role in the supply path. As many as 2 motors are associated with the hopper assembly: black toner supply motor (M25) and hopper stirring motor (M23), serving to adjust the amount of toner sent to the black developing assembly.
Page 317 Chapter 7 IfToner Inside the Hopper Assembly Toner absence detected 1.9S 2.0S 1.0S 1cycle (Max:20cycle) F-7-46 If Toner Runs Out in the Black Developing Assembly Toner absence detected 0.3S 4.5S 0.5S 1cycle (Max:8cycles) F-7-47 E020 00FF (hopper stirring motor error) indicates that ITS1=0 continues when the hopper stirring motor has been driven for 8 cycles (ON for 4.5 sec, OFF for 0.5 sec x 8 times) after the presence of toner inside the hopper (TS2=1) and the absence of toner (TS1=0) inside the black toner assembly have been detected.
Page 318: Controlling The Black Developing Bias
Chapter 7 7.7.9 Controlling the Black Developing Bias 0003-1156 The black developing bias is used to enable depositing of black toner over the latent static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum, and there are 2 types of black developing biases: black developing DC bias and black developing AC bias.
Page 319: Transfer Device
Chapter 7 7.8 Transfer Device 7.8.1 Overview of the Transfer Assembly 0003-1171 The transfer assembly is divided into the primary transfer assembly and the secondary transfer assembly. The primary transfer assembly serves to transfer the toner image of the photosensitive drum to the ITB, while the secondary transfer assembly moves the image transferred to it onto paper.
Page 320: Controlling The Transfer Bias
Chapter 7 7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias 0003-1173 The transfer bias may be the primary transfer bias used in the primary transfer assembly or the secondary transfer bias used in the secondary transfer assembly. There are 3 types of primary transfer biases (primary transfer DC bias, primary transfer DC reverse bias, primary transfer static eliminator bias), while there are 2 types of secondary transfer biases (secondary DC bias, secondary transfer DC reverse bias).
Page 321 Chapter 7 DC CON: DC controller What follows below is an additional explanation of the individual biases used in the transfer assemblies: 1. Primary Transfer Bias (application bias: DC) The primary transfer bias is used to transfer the toner image on the photosensitive drum to the ITB, and is applied to the primary transfer roller.
Page 322: Overview Of The Primary Transfer Assembly
Chapter 7 7.8.3 Overview of the Primary Transfer Assembly 0003-1177 The primary transfer assembly is driven by 2 motors, mainly serving to rotate major rollers and relocate the rollers. The drum/ITB motor (M2) is used to rotate the ITB drive roller and the ITB cleaning screw; the ITB cleaner shift motor (M21), on the other hand, is used to move the ITB cleaner to and from the ITB belt.
Page 323: Controlling The Itb Cleaner Shifting Mechanism
Chapter 7 7.8.4 Controlling the ITB Cleaner Shifting Mechanism 0003-1180 The machine moves the ITB cleaner to and from the ITB for removal of toner remaining on the ITB. To bring the cleaner into contact with the belt, the DC controller drives the ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) at the following timing of operation: 1.
Page 324: Checking The Itb Cleaner Position
Chapter 7 7.8.5 Checking the ITB Cleaner Position 0003-1182 The machine runs a home position search to locate the ITB cleaner. The DC controller checks the location with reference to the output of the ITB cleaner home position sensor (PS23). When the power is turned on or the front cover is opened/closed, the DC controller checks to find out if the home position flag attached to the drive shaft of the ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) blocks M23.
Page 325: Overview Of The Secondary Transfer Assembly
Chapter 7 7.8.6 Overview of the Secondary Transfer Assembly 0003-1183 The secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) drives the secondary transfer outside roller to move it into contact with or away from the ITB inside the secondary transfer assembly. The DC controller controls the operation of M26 for the movement;...
Page 326: Controlling The Movement Of The Secondary Transfer Roller
Chapter 7 7.8.7 Controlling the Movement of the Secondary Transfer Roller 0003-1184 The machine moves the secondary transfer outside roller into contact with or away from the ITB for transfer of toner images from the ITB to paper. The DC controller drives the secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) to move the roller at the following timing of operation: 1.
Page 327: Checking The Location Of The Secondary Transfer Roller
Chapter 7 1 Secondary transfer outside roller 2 Shift arm 3 Shift cam M20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor DC CON: DC controller 7.8.8 Checking the Location of the Secondary Transfer Roller 0003-1244 The machine runs a home position search to check the location of the secondary transfer outside roller, i.e., the DC controller checks on the output of the secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor (PS22).
Page 328: Detecting The Itb Home Position
Chapter 7 1 Secondary transfer outside roller home position flag PS22: secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor M20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor DC CON: DC controller E077 0001 (secondary transfer outside roller shift motor error) indicates that the secondary transfer roller remains locked in place (PS22=1) 5 sec after the secondary transfer outside roller motor (M20) is started.
Page 329 Chapter 7 1 ITB 2 Reflecting surface PS1: ITB home position sensor A PS30: ITB home position sensor B DC CON: DC controller Memo: The side A home position detection signal (I_TOP1A) is the signal used when forming an image for a single page at a time.
Page 330: Separation
Chapter 7 The term "2 paper placement" refers to printing in which images for 2 pages are formed on the ITB at the same time. It may be used for up to LTR size (sub scanning direction), limited by the interval between 2 home position detection signals.
Page 331: Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
Chapter 7 7.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning 7.9.1 Overview of the Drum Cleaning Unit 0003-6411 The drum cleaning unit is found next to the photosensitive drum inside the process unit, and it is equipped with the function of collecting residual toner from the photosensitive drum. The unit consists of 4 components, serving to clean the photosensitive drum in preparation for the next print cycle.
Page 332: Controlling The Drum Cleaning Unit Drive Mechanism
Chapter 7 7.9.2 Controlling the Drum Cleaning Unit Drive Mechanism 0003-6412 The drum cleaning unit possesses 2 drive loads; they are controlled by the DC controller, and turned on when the ITB/drum motor (M2) goes on. DC-CON J1109B F-7-63 1 Magnet roller 2 Waste toner feedscrew M2: ITB/drum motor DC CON: DC controller...
Page 333: Waste Toner Collection Mechanism
Chapter 7 7.10 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism 7.10.1 Collection of Waste Toner 0003-6401 The machine uses its waste toner bottle to collect waste toner from 3 imaging units (i.e., drum cleaning unit, color toner developing assembly, ITB cleaning unit). The mechanism of collection involves the DC controller, which drives the development motor (M3) to turn the screw inside the waste toner pipe.
Page 334: Detecting The State Of The Waste Toner Bottle (Full)
Chapter 7 [4] Color developing unit discharge opening [5] ITB cleaning unit discharge opening [6] Waste toner bottle [7] Waste toner [8] Waste toner feedscrew gear M3: developing motor SW1: waste toner lock detecting switch DC CON: DC controller 7.10.2 Detecting the State of the Waste Toner Bottle (full) 0003-6402 The machine checks the state of the waste toner bottle to see if it is full and thus to prevent overflowing of waste toner.
Page 335 Chapter 7 WASTE_TNR_ERR0 DC-CON < Rear view > F-7-65 [1] Drum cleaning unit discharge opening [2] Waste toner tube [3] Waste toner feedscrew [4] Color developing unit discharge opening [5] ITB cleaning unit discharge opening [6] Waste toner bottle [7] Waste toner [8] Waste toner feedscrew gear M3: developing motor SW1: waste toner lock detecting switch...
Page 336 Chapter 7 Memo : E013 0001 (waste toner full error) indicates that the soft counter reading is 250000 or higher. E013 0002 (waste toner feedscrew error) indicates that the output of the waste toner lock detecting switch (SW1) is "1" for 1 sec or more. (If the waste toner feedscrew fails to rotate when the developing motor (M3) is driven, the waste toner feedscrew is pushed in the direction of the arrow, thus turning on SW1.) 1.
Page 337: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 7 7.11 Parts Replacement Procedure 7.11.1 Process Unit 7.11.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0003-8201 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2]. F-7-68 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process unit cover [2].
Page 338: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-71 F-7-74 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 339: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw open the hopper assembly [2]. [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. F-7-77 F-7-80 7.11.1.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005-7265 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 340 Chapter 7 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to assembly [3]. the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 341: Removing The Process Unit
Chapter 7 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] about 50 mm. F-7-89 7.11.1.8 Removing the Process Unit 0003-2410 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] found at the F-7-87 upper right.
Page 342 Chapter 7 3) After freeing the cable from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the high voltage connector cable [1] in place using the cable hook [3] to avoid trapping it during the work. F-7-92 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from F-7-94 its back.
Page 343 Chapter 7 7) Remove the 2 binding screws [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 drawer hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, pull out the fixing/feeding assembly [2] fully. F-7-96 8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 344: Pre Exposure Led Array
Chapter 7 7.11.2.2 Freeing the Front 12) Lift the 2 locations [1] indicated in the diagram, and detach the process unit [2]. Cover 0003-2510 1) Open the front cover. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 345 Chapter 7 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. unit cover [2]. F-7-105 F-7-108 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the...
Page 346 Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper 5) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the left. drum fixing member [2] of the drum shift [1], remove the fixing screw [4]. 1: Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
Page 347 Chapter 7 6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward member [1]. the front. F-7-114 F-7-117 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 348: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and fully slide out the process unit [2]. F-7-121 7.11.2.4 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003-2511 F-7-119 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. When you have slid out the process unit, check to see if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in;...
Page 349: Removing The Primary Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 F-7-124 F-7-127 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. 7.11.2.6 Removing Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0003-2507 1) Open the 2 cable clamps [1], and lead the harness [2] through the opening [3] in the process unit. F-7-125 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2].
Page 350: Primary Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.3 Primary Charging Assembly 3) Disconnect the connector [1]. 7.11.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0003-8248 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2]. F-7-130 4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the photosensitive drum cleaning unit [2].
Page 351: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach the front cover strap [2]. F-7-138 F-7-135 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process unit cover [2].
Page 352: Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor
Chapter 7 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully bottle [2]. open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-141 F-7-144 7.11.3.4 Removing the Primary Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Charging Assembly can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the 0002-6213...
Page 353 Chapter 7 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process unit cover [2]. F-7-146 7.11.4.2 Freeing the Front F-7-149 Cover 0003-2479 1) Open the front cover. 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual lever in place.
Page 354 Chapter 7 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such toner.
Page 355: Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.4.4 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 0003-2481 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Loosen the screw [2], and slide the primary charging assembly stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow; then, tighten the screw [2]. F-7-160 3) Detach the primary charging assembly [4] from the machine.
Page 356: Pre Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor
Chapter 7 7.11.6 Pre transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor 7.11.6.1 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0003-2482 1) Open the front cover, 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process unit cover [2]. F-7-165 2) Turn over the motor cover, and detach the pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor from the motor...
Page 357: Freeing The
Chapter 7 7.11.7.2 Freeing the Front 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process Cover 0003-2490 unit cover [2]. 1) Open the front cover. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 358 Chapter 7 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such toner.
Page 359 Chapter 7 7.11.7.4 Sliding Out the 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from Process Unit 0003-2493 the back of the cover. 1) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper right.
Page 360 Chapter 7 Moreover, when you close the process unit, it is 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward important that the spatial relationship between the the front. protrusion of the drum fixing member and the marking on the drum flange is as it was before you drew out the unit.
Page 361: Photosensitive Drum
Chapter 7 7.11.7.5 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 0004-6627 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Loosen the screw [2], and slide the primary charging assembly stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow; then, tighten the screw [2]. 3) Detach the primary charging assembly [4] from the machine.
Page 362 Chapter 7 7.11.7.7 Points to Note When 2) Open the 8 cable clamps [1], and move the harness [2] out of the way. Mounting the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0003-8364 When mounting the photosensitive drum cleaning unit, take care not to rotate it in reverse direction to prevent soiling by the scoop up sheet.
Page 363 Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] the front cover strap [2]. and the latch plate (front) F-7-202 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 364 Chapter 7 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully bottle [2]. open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-205 F-7-208 7.11.8.4 Removing the Pre Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Transfer Charging Assembly can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the 0003-2837...
Page 365 Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly [3]. F-7-211 F-7-214 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 366 Chapter 7 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper about 50 mm.
Page 367 Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper When you remove the transfer cleaner drive left. assembly, the ITB cleaning blade [1] is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring, causing toner [2] to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines.
Page 368 Chapter 7 5) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the 6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing drum fixing member [2] of the drum shift [1], remove member [1]. the fixing screw [4]. 1: Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
Page 369 Chapter 7 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward the front. F-7-231 F-7-229 When you have slid out the process unit, check to see 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out fitting it back in;...
Page 370 Chapter 7 7.11.8.9 Removing the Primary 2) Open the 8 cable clamps [1], and move the harness [2] out of the way. Charging Assembly 0003-2835 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Loosen the screw [2], and slide the primary charging assembly stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow;...
Page 371 Chapter 7 7.11.8.11 Removing the Black 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the black developing assembly locking plate [1]. Developing Unit 0003-2839 Points to Note About the Work 1 The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover. Take full care, therefore, not to damage the developing cylinder when you have detached the developing unit.
Page 372 Chapter 7 7.11.8.12 Removing 5) Push in the high voltage cable [1] through the opening [2] indicated in the figure. Photosensitive Drum 0003-2841 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the charging assembly rail [2]. F-7-244 F-7-246 6) While holding the high voltage cable [1] in place as shown, detach the black developing assembly [2] in 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the charging upward direction.
Page 373 Chapter 7 7.11.8.13 Replacing the 4) Pull the photosensitive drum [1] toward the front once, and then detach it. Photosensitive Drum 0005-9072 If you have replaced the photosensitive drum, be sure to go through the following: 1) Remove the drum heater and the drum heater PCB; then, mount them to the new photosensitive drum.
Page 374: Drum Motor
Chapter 7 7.11.9 Drum Motor 7.11.9.2 Removing the Rear Cover (lower) 0004-1052 7.11.9.1 Removing the Rear 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (lower) [2]. Cover (upper) 0004-1051 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3].
Page 375 Chapter 7 7.11.9.4 Sliding the DC 7.11.9.5 Removing the DC Controller Box Controller Box 0004-1054 0004-1055 1) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the DC 1) Open the 3 cable guides [1], and free the harness controller cover [2]. [2].
Page 376 Chapter 7 7.11.9.6 Points to Note When 7.11.9.7 Removing the Drum Mounting the DC Controller Motor 0004-1056 0005-7221 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fly wheel [2]. During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2].
Page 377: Drum Heater
Chapter 7 7.11.10 Drum Heater If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) 7.11.10.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0004-4602 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2]. F-7-265 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly F-7-263...
Page 378 Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-268 F-7-271 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 379 Chapter 7 7.11.10.5 Removing the Transfer 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. Cleaner Drive Assembly 0004-4623 1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1]. F-7-274 7.11.10.4 Removing the Pre F-7-276 Transfer Charging Assembly 0005-7266 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw...
Page 380: Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 5) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the locking 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. plate [2]. 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 381 Chapter 7 F-7-286 7.11.10.8 Sliding F-7-284 Process Unit 0004-4628 3) If there is any toner [3] on the surface of the 1) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper intermediate transfer belt, dry wipe it with lint free right.
Page 382 Chapter 7 3) After freeing the high voltage connector cable [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the cable in place using the cable hook [3]. F-7-289 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from the back of the cover.
Page 383 Chapter 7 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2]. F-7-293 8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 384 Chapter 7 7.11.10.10 Removing Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0004-4634 1) Open the 2 cable clamps [1], and lead the harness [2] through the opening [3] in the process unit. F-7-298 F-7-301 2) Open the 8 cable clamps [1], and move the harness [2] out of the way.
Page 385 Chapter 7 4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the 1) Open the harness guide used to fix the high voltage photosensitive drum cleaning unit [2]. cable [1] in place. F-7-306 F-7-304 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the black 7.11.10.11 Removing developing assembly locking plate [1].
Page 386 Chapter 7 7.11.10.12 Removing 4) Disconnect the connector [1]. Photosensitive Drum 0004-4651 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the charging assembly rail [2]. F-7-309 5) Push in the high voltage cable [1] through the opening [2] indicated in the figure. F-7-312 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the charging assembly rail fixing plate [2].
Page 387 Chapter 7 Memo: At the font, hold the photosensitive drum shaft [1], There is a light difference in the inside diameter of the and lift the drum; then, place it on the level area of the photosensitive drum between its front and its rear. heat process unit front plate.
Page 388 Chapter 7 3. Check the drum phase label [1] attached behind the process unit cover. F-7-320 7.11.10.15 Removing the Drum Heater 0002-6234 F-7-318 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the flange found at the front [2]. See the following sample. The cell with a check mark [1] indicates the present drum phase location.
Page 389: Drum Heater Pcb
Chapter 7 3) Lift the drum heater upright from the photosensitive drum; then, detach the drum heater. F-7-325 If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) F-7-323 7.11.11 Drum Heater PCB 7.11.11.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0004-4604 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover...
Page 390 Chapter 7 7.11.11.3 Releasing the Hopper 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and slide out the right deck [2]. Assembly 0004-4609 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-328 F-7-331 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2].
Page 391 Chapter 7 7.11.11.5 Removing the Transfer 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Cleaner Drive Assembly 0004-4624 1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1]. F-7-334 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-337 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2];...
Page 392 Chapter 7 5) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the locking 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. plate [2]. 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 393: Sliding Out The Process Unit
Chapter 7 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] about 50 mm. F-7-347 7.11.11.8 Sliding Process Unit 0004-4631 1) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper F-7-345 right.
Page 394 Chapter 7 3) After freeing the high voltage connector cable [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the cable in place using the cable hook [3]. F-7-350 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from the back of the cover.
Page 395 Chapter 7 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2]. F-7-354 8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 396 Chapter 7 When you have slid out the process unit, check to see 3) Detach the primary charging assembly [4] from the if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before machine. fitting it back in; if soiled, dry wipe the part: entire surface of the deck top panel [1] front bend of the deck top panel [2] lower rear sheet (4 locations) of the fixing/feeding...
Page 397 Chapter 7 3) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2. The machine's black developing unit is equipped with a potential sensor. Do not touch the sensor window [1] indicated in the figure. Moreover, take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to avoid damage to the potential sensor.
Page 398 Chapter 7 3) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the black 6) While holding the high voltage cable [1] in place as developing assembly joint plate [1]. shown, detach the black developing assembly [2] in upward direction. When detaching the black developing assembly, be sure to work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive drum.
Page 399 Chapter 7 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the charging assembly rail fixing plate [2]. 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the bearing stopper [4]. F-7-374 F-7-376 4) Pull the photosensitive drum [1] toward the front once, and then detach it. 7.11.11.13 Points to Note When Mounting the Photosensitive Drum 0006-0364...
Page 400 Chapter 7 7.11.11.14 Removing the 7.11.11.15 Removing Drum Heater Drum Heater PCB 0004-4658 0002-6236 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the flange 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drum found at the front [2]. heater PCB together with the flange. F-7-378 F-7-381 2) Disconnect the connector [1].
Page 401 Chapter 7 7.11.11.16 Points to Note 3. Check the drum phase label [1] attached behind the process unit cover. When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB 0006-2081 Drum memory can occur if the phase of the drum is changed, as when replacing the drum heater PCB. Take full care not to change the phase of the drum during the work by making sure of the following: 1.
Page 402: Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade
Chapter 7 4. Be sure to fit the drum fixing member [1] to the drum flange [2] in correct relation to the phase location indicated on the drum phase label. F-7-389 If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) F-7-387 7.11.12...
Page 403 Chapter 7 7.11.12.3 Releasing the Hopper 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and slide out the right deck [2]. Assembly 0003-2501 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-392 F-7-395 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2].
Page 404 Chapter 7 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. 2) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper left. F-7-398 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully F-7-401 open the hopper assembly [2]. 3) After freeing the high voltage connector cable [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the cable in place using the cable hook [3].
Page 405 Chapter 7 5) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the 6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing drum fixing member [2] of the drum shift [1], remove member [1]. the fixing screw [4]. 1: Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
Page 406 Chapter 7 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward 11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and the front. fully slide out the process unit [2]. F-7-408 F-7-410 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out When you have slid out the process unit, check to see the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 407: Removing The Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.12.5 Removing the Primary 2) Open the 8 cable clamps [1], and move the harness [2] out of the way. Charging Assembly 0004-6632 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Loosen the screw [2], and slide the primary charging assembly stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow;...
Page 408 Chapter 7 7.11.12.7 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade 0002-6256 1) Remove the E ring [1], and detach the locking spring [2]. F-7-420 3. Be sure to mount the cleaning blade [1] so that the lot No. [2] faces the front and is upright. F-7-418 2) Remove the 5 screw s[1], and detach the photosensitive drum cleaning blade.
Page 409: Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper
Chapter 7 5. Be sure to tighten the screws [1] on the cleaning blade in the order indicated in the figure. F-7-423 6. Apply blade lubricant (TKN 0480) along the edge F-7-425 (shaded; coming into contact with the photosensitive drum) of the cleaning blade. 7.11.13.2 Releasing the Front Cover 0004-1092...
Page 410: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. unit cover [2]. F-7-428 F-7-431 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the...
Page 411: Sliding Out The Process Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.13.4 Sliding Out the Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Process Unit 0004-1093 can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such 1) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper toner.
Page 412 Chapter 7 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the 2: When drawing out the process unit, be sure to find shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from out the position of the protrusion [1] of the drum the back of the cover.
Page 413 Chapter 7 8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing 11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and lever [1] in the direction of the arrow. fully slide out the process unit [2]. F-7-444 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward F-7-447 the front.
Page 414: Removing The Primary Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.13.5 Removing the 2) Open the 8 cable clamps [1], and move the harness [2] out of the way. Primary Charging Assembly 0004-6633 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Loosen the screw [2], and slide the primary charging assembly stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow;...
Page 415: Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.13.7 Removing the 7.11.14.2 Releasing the Front Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Cover 0003-2466 End Scraper 0004-1089 1) Open the front cover. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual 1) Detach the double sided adhesive tape (2 strips) of feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 416 Chapter 7 7.11.14.3 Releasing the Hopper 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Assembly 0003-0967 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. slide out the right deck [2]. F-7-463 F-7-460 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner...
Page 417: Hopper Supply Motor
Chapter 7 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. 2) Close the hopper assembly. 3) Remove the E ring [1]. F-7-466 F-7-469 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 4) Open the hopper assembly, and lift it to detach. open the hopper assembly [2].
Page 418 Chapter 7 7.11.15.2 Releasing the Front 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Cover 0003-2470 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the front cover. slide out the right deck [2]. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 419: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.15.3 Releasing the Hopper 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Assembly 0003-2471 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-480 F-7-477 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2].
Page 420: Hopper Strring Motor
Chapter 7 2) Close the hopper assembly. 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 3) Remove the E ring [1]. connectors [1]; then, detach the black toner supply motor [3]. F-7-483 4) Open the hopper assembly, and lift it to detach. 7.11.15.5 Removing the Black Toner Supply Motor 0002-6268...
Page 421 Chapter 7 7.11.16.2 Releasing the Front 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Cover 0003-2467 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the front cover. slide out the right deck [2]. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 422 Chapter 7 7.11.16.3 Releasing the Hopper 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Assembly 0003-2468 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-496 F-7-493 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2].
Page 423: Color Developing Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.17 Color Developing Assembly 2) Close the hopper assembly. 3) Remove the E ring [1]. 7.11.17.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0003-8257 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2]. F-7-499 4) Open the hopper assembly, and lift it to detach. 7.11.16.5 Removing Hopper Stirring Motor...
Page 424 Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] the front cover strap [2]. and the latch plate (front) F-7-506 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 425: Sliding Out The Process Unit
Chapter 7 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully bottle [2]. open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-509 F-7-512 7.11.17.4 Sliding Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Process Unit can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the 0003-2526...
Page 426 Chapter 7 3) After freeing the high voltage connector cable [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the cable in place using the cable hook [3]. F-7-515 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from the back of the cover.
Page 427 Chapter 7 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2]. F-7-519 8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 428: Removing The Black Developing Unit
Chapter 7 When you have slid out the process unit, check to see 2. The machine's black developing unit is equipped if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before with a potential sensor. Do not touch the sensor fitting it back in;...
Page 429: Removing The Color Developing Unit
Chapter 7 3) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the black top of the assembly so that its connector will not developing assembly joint plate [1]. damage the surface of the photosensitive drum. F-7-529 F-7-532 4) Disconnect the connector [1]. 7.11.17.6 Removing the Color Developing Unit 0002-5816...
Page 430 Chapter 7 3) Fix the torque limiter [2] in place using a screw [1]. 5) Rotate the developing rotary until the developing cylinder [1] of the color developing unit you are If you fail to fix the torque limiter in place, the removing faces upward.
Page 431: When Replacing The Color Developing Unit
Chapter 7 3) Even out the starter by shaking the container about If you have to rotate the developing rotary farther, 10 times. be sure to tape the toner supply mouth to prevent 4) Open the lid [2] of the starter bottle [1]; then, spilling the toner.
Page 432 Chapter 7 7) Supply the remaining half of the starter around the Force down the lid against the container so that the stirring screw inside the color developing unit. gap [1] indicated in the figure is small enough to 8) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times once again so prevent insertion of a transparency.
Page 433 Chapter 7 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET M 3) On A3 paper or in a vinyl bag, dispose of the if for the C developing assembly, contents of the unit by turning it over. COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET C if for the CMY developing assemblies, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET 3 A countdown is shown on the screen while this mode item is under way.
Page 434 Chapter 7 5) Dispose of the agent into a vinyl bag or on paper by turning over the developing unit. 6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) about 3 times (e.g., until no agent drops into the developing assembly). 7) Shake the container of the starter about 10 times. 8) Detach the funnel [2] of the starter bottle [1];...
Page 435: Black Developing Assembly
Chapter 7 19) Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC P>P PRINT. Then, put the generated printout in the service book case. If there is any previous printout, dispose of it. 20) End service mode, and select 'auto gradation correction' in sure mode; execute auto gradation correction (full correction) by going through the instructions on the screen.
Page 436 Chapter 7 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] lever in place. and the latch plate (front) 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and slide out the right deck [2].
Page 437: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.18.3 Releasing the Hopper 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Assembly 0003-2518 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-569 F-7-566 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2].
Page 438 Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper 5) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the left. drum fixing member [2] of the drum shift [1], remove the fixing screw [4]. 1: Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
Page 439 Chapter 7 6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward member [1]. the front. F-7-576 F-7-579 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 440: Removing The Black Developing Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.18.5 Removing the Black 11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and fully slide out the process unit [2]. Developing Unit 0002-6286 Points to Note About the Work 1 The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover.
Page 441 Chapter 7 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the black 5) Push in the high voltage cable [1] through the developing assembly locking plate [1]. opening [2] indicated in the figure. F-7-586 F-7-589 3) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the black developing assembly joint plate [1].
Page 442: Points To Note About Replacing The Black Developing Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.18.6 Points to Note About Replacing the Black Developing Unit 0003-0418 Do not touch the sensor window [1] shown in the figure during the work. Also, take care not to drop or otherwise subject the black developing unit to impact to avoid damage to the potential sensor F-7-591 If you are replacing the black developing unit, you...
Page 443: Black Developing Cylinder
Chapter 7 7.11.19 Black Developing Cylinder Hold the black developing assembly [1] by its ends as shown in the figure; then, while keeping it level, push it in at an angle to set. When doing so, be sure to match 7.11.19.1 Removing the Right the boss [2] found at the rear of the developing Cover (upper)
Page 444 Chapter 7 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] lever in place. and the latch plate (front) 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and slide out the right deck [2].
Page 445: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.19.3 Releasing the Hopper 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Assembly 0003-6700 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-606 F-7-603 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2].
Page 446 Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper 5) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the left. drum fixing member [2] of the drum shift [1], remove the fixing screw [4]. 1: Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
Page 447 Chapter 7 6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward member [1]. the front. F-7-613 F-7-616 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 448: Removing The Black Developing Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.19.5 Removing the Black 11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and fully slide out the process unit [2]. Developing Unit 0003-6706 Points to Note About the Work 1 The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover.
Page 449 Chapter 7 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the black 5) Push in the high voltage cable [1] through the developing assembly locking plate [1]. opening [2] indicated in the figure. F-7-623 F-7-626 3) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the black developing assembly joint plate [1].
Page 450: Removing The Black Developing Cylinder
Chapter 7 7.11.19.6 Removing the Black 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the magnetic positioning plate [2]. Developing Cylinder 0003-6707 When mounting the developing cylinder, take care not to touch the surface of the cylinder. Also, take full care not to damage the surface. The machine's black developing unit is equipped with a potential sensor.
Page 451: Points To Note When Handling The Black Developing Cylinder
Chapter 7 8) Remove the E ring [1], gear [2], collar [3], and Shift polarity positioning plate bearing [4] from the rear of the machine. counterclockwise as much as the length of the play of the D cut notch [2]; then, read the index [4] of the marking found on the blade support base.
Page 452: Black Developing Clutch
Chapter 7 7.11.20 Black Developing Clutch 7.11.20.1 Remove the Rear Cover (upper) 0004-1057 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3]. F-7-640 7.11.20.3 Sliding the DC Controller Box 0004-1063 1) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the DC controller cover [2].
Page 453 Chapter 7 7.11.20.4 Removing the DC 7.11.20.5 Points to Note When Mounting Controller Box the DC Controller Box 0004-1066 0005-7218 1) Open the 3 cable guides [1], and free the harness During assembly work, be sure to connect the [2]. harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2].
Page 454 Chapter 7 7.11.20.6 Removing the Black 4) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and free the 3 harnesses [2] from the 6 cable guides [3]. Developing Clutch 0004-1069 5) Remove the 3 screws [4], and detach the side plate 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fly wheel [5].
Page 455: Color Toner Supply Clutch
Chapter 7 7.11.21 Color Toner Supply Clutch 7.11.21.1 Removing the Rear Cover (upper) 0004-1058 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3]. F-7-653 7.11.21.3 Sliding the DC Controller Box 0004-1064 1) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the DC controller cover [2].
Page 456 Chapter 7 7.11.21.4 Removing the DC 7.11.21.5 Points to Note When Mounting Controller Box the DC Controller Box 0004-1067 0005-7219 1) Open the 3 cable guides [1], and free the harness During assembly work, be sure to connect the [2]. harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2].
Page 457: Color Developing Clutch
Chapter 7 6) Remove the color toner supply clutch [1]. F-7-660 F-7-663 2) Remove the spring [1], and loosen the screw [2]; 7.11.22 Color Developing Clutch then, turn the tensioner [3] clockwise. 3) Detach the timing belt [4]. 7.11.22.1 Removing the Rear Cover (upper) 0004-1059 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1].
Page 458: Removing The Right Cover (Upper Rear)
Chapter 7 7.11.22.3 Sliding 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (upper) [2]. Controller Box 0004-1065 1) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the DC controller cover [2]. F-7-665 7.11.22.2 Removing the Right F-7-667 Cover (upper rear) 0004-1062 1) Detach the reader communications cable [1].
Page 459 Chapter 7 7.11.22.4 Removing the DC 7.11.22.5 Points to Note When Controller Box Mounting the DC Controller 0004-1068 0005-7220 1) Open the 3 cable guides [1], and free the harness [2]. During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2].
Page 460: Removing The Color Developing Clutch
Chapter 7 7.11.22.6 Removing the Color 4) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and free the 3 harnesses [2] from the 6 cable guides [3]. Developing Clutch 0004-1071 5) Remove the 3 screws [4], and detach the side plate 1 Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fly wheel [5].
Page 461: Cleaning Assembly Scoop Up Sheet
Chapter 7 7.11.23 Cleaning Assembly If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) Scoop Up Sheet 7.11.23.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0003-8259 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 462: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-682 F-7-685 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 463: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw open the hopper assembly [2]. [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. F-7-688 7.11.23.4 Removing the Pre F-7-691 Transfer Charging Assembly 0003-2861...
Page 464 Chapter 7 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to assembly [3]. the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 465 Chapter 7 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] about 50 mm. F-7-700 7.11.23.8 Sliding Process Unit 0003-2857 1) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper F-7-698 right.
Page 466 Chapter 7 3) After freeing the high voltage connector cable [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the cable in place using the cable hook [3]. F-7-703 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from the back of the cover.
Page 467 Chapter 7 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2]. F-7-707 8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 468: Secondary Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.23.10 Mounting the entire surface of the deck top panel [1] front bend of the deck top panel [2] Photosensitive Drum Cleaner lower rear sheet (4 locations) of the fixing/feeding Scoop Up Sheet 0003-2876 assembly [3]. 1) Engage the hole found at the rear of the photosensitive drum scoop up sheet [1] on the hook [2]: then, pull it toward the front and fix in place with a screw [3].
Page 469: Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 3) While pushing the 2 hooks [1] frond on both sides 6) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1]. of the fixing/feeding assembly, slide out the fixing/ feeding assembly [2] fully. F-7-719 7) While shifting the secondary transfer unit [1], disconnect the 2 connectors [2];...
Page 470 Chapter 7 7.11.25.2 Releasing the Front 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Cover 0003-2532 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the front cover. slide out the right deck [2]. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 471: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.25.3 Releasing the Hopper 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Assembly 0003-2533 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-731 F-7-728 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2].
Page 472 Chapter 7 7.11.25.5 Removing the Transfer 5) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the locking plate [2]. Cleaning Drive Assembly 0003-2531 1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1]. F-7-737 F-7-734 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 screws [2];...
Page 473: Cleaning The Surface Of The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper about 50 mm.
Page 474: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.25.8 Removing the ITB When you remove the transfer cleaner drive Cleaning Unit 0002-6349 assembly, the ITB cleaning blade [1] is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, slide the ITB work of a spring, causing toner [2] to deposit on the cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to belt surface in the form of lines.
Page 475: Itb Cleaner End Scraper
Chapter 7 7.11.26 ITB Cleaner End Scraper If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) 7.11.26.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0005-9396 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 476: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-751 F-7-754 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 477: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw open the hopper assembly [2]. [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. F-7-757 F-7-760 7.11.26.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0006-1403 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 478 Chapter 7 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to assembly [3]. the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 479 Chapter 7 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] about 50 mm. F-7-769 7.11.26.8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0005-9401 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, slide the ITB F-7-767 cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 480: Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.26.9 Removing the ITB 7.11.27 Intermediate Transfer Unit Cleaner End Scraper 0005-9394 7.11.27.1 Removing the Right 1) Detach the 2 end scrapers [1] by peeling off the 2 strips of double sided tape. Cover (upper) 0003-8261 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 481 Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] the front cover strap [2]. and the latch plate (front) F-7-778 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 482: Removing The Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly
Chapter 7 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully bottle [2]. open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-781 F-7-784 7.11.27.4 Removing the Pre Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Transfer Charging Assembly can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the 0005-7254...
Page 483 Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. 5 screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly [3]. F-7-787 F-7-790 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 484 Chapter 7 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper about 50 mm.
Page 485: Intermediate Transfer Belt
Chapter 7 7.11.28.2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003-2578 1) Open the front cover. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front. F-7-796 F-7-798 7.11.27.8 Points to Note When Replacing the Intermediate If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] Transfer Unit 0002-6338...
Page 486 Chapter 7 7.11.28.3 Releasing the Hopper 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Assembly 0003-2580 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. slide out the right deck [2]. F-7-804 F-7-801 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner...
Page 487 Chapter 7 7.11.28.5 Removing the Transfer 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Cleaning Drive Assembly 0003-2577 1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1]. F-7-807 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-810 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2];...
Page 488 Chapter 7 5) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the locking 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. plate [2]. 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 489: Removing The Patch Image Reading Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.28.8 Removing the Patch Image Reading Unit 0003-9012 1) Shift the arm [1] shown in the figure to lock it in place; thus releasing the roller (both front and rear). F-7-820 7.11.28.9 Removing the Idler Roller 0003-2655 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pre transfer F-7-818 guide [2].
Page 490: Points To Note When Attaching The Itb
Chapter 7 7.11.28.11 Points to Note 2) Holding the shaft of the idler roller [1], pull the roller upright to detach. When Attaching the ITB 0002-6342 When attaching the intermediate transfer belt, take full care so that the belt will not be upside down. See that the red marking [1] is found on the edge of the intermediate transfer belt.
Page 491: Itb Home Position Sensor Pcb
Chapter 7 7.11.29 ITB Home Position Sensor 7.11.29.1 Removing the ITB Home Position Sensor (right, left) 0002-6353 1) Detach the ITB. 2) Remove the screws [1] (2 pc. each), and disconnect the connectors [2] (1 pc. each); then, detach the ITB home position sensor (right) [3] and the other ITB home position sensor (left) [4].
Page 492: Primary Transfer Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.31 Primary Transfer Roller If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) 7.11.31.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0003-8265 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 493: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-833 F-7-836 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 494: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw open the hopper assembly [2]. [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. F-7-839 F-7-842 7.11.31.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005-7257 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 495: Cleaning The Surface Of The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly [3]. F-7-847 7.11.31.7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006-0341 F-7-845 1) Place the ITB unit [1] on paper for protection. 7.11.31.6 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit...
Page 496: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.31.8 Removing the ITB 3) If there is any toner [3] on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt, dry wipe it with lint free Cleaning Unit 0003-2583 paper. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, slide the ITB cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 497: Removing The Idler Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.31.10 Removing the Idler 2) Stand the intermediate transfer unit by fitting its 2 pints [2] in the 2 holes of the fixing/feeding assembly. Roller 0003-2660 Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pre transfer already removed.
Page 498: Points To Note When Replacing The Primary Transfer Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.31.12 Removing 2) Holding the shaft of the idler roller [1], pull the roller upright to detach. Primary Transfer Roller 0002-6343 1) Shift the locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrows; then, lift the roller arm [2]. F-7-859 2) Pick the shaft [1] of the primary transfer roller [2], and detach the roller.
Page 499 Chapter 7 2) Clean the rollers [1] and the inside scraper [2] using The idler roller (indicated by an arrow) is designed alcohol. for mounting after fitting the intermediate transfer belt. Although the figure shows the roller, it is only for reference purposes, and the roller is not in its indicated position at this point in time.
Page 500: Secondary Transfer Internal Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.32.2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003-2592 1) Open the front cover. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front. F-7-866 F-7-864 If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] When you have replaced the primary transfer and the latch plate (front) roller, be sure to execute the following service mode...
Page 501: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.32.3 Releasing the Hopper 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Assembly 0003-2593 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. slide out the right deck [2]. F-7-872 F-7-869 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner...
Page 502: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.32.5 Removing the Transfer 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003-2591 1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1]. F-7-875 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-878 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2];...
Page 503: Removing The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 5) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the locking 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. plate [2]. 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 504: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of When you remove the transfer cleaner drive the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] assembly, the ITB cleaning blade [1] is likely to come about 50 mm.
Page 505: Removing The Patch Image Reading Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.32.9 Removing the Patch Image Reading Unit 0003-9011 1) Shift the arm [1] shown in the figure to lock it in place; thus releasing the roller (both front and rear). F-7-892 7.11.32.10 Removing the Idler Roller 0003-2662 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pre transfer F-7-890 guide [2].
Page 506: Secondary Transfer Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.32.12 Removing the Secondary 2) Holding the shaft of the idler roller [1], pull the roller upright to detach. Transfer Inside Roller 0002-5733 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] found at the rear of the intermediate transfer unit; then, shift the electrode [2] in counterclockwise direction.
Page 507: Removing The Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder
Chapter 7 6) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1]. F-7-901 7) While shifting the secondary transfer unit [1], disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the secondary transfer unit. F-7-898 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2]. F-7-902 7.11.33.2 Removing...
Page 508: Itb Cleaning Blade
Chapter 7 7.11.33.3 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller 0002-6346 1) Remove the 2 E rings [1], and detach the left roller arm [2] and the right roller arm [3]. [1] [2] F-7-906 7.11.34.2 Releasing the Front Cover F-7-904 0003-2597 1) Open the front cover. 2) Pull out the 2 secondary roller bushing [1] in the 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual direction of the arrow;...
Page 509: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. unit cover [2]. F-7-909 F-7-912 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the...
Page 510: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.34.4 Removing the Pre Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Transfer Charging Assembly 0005-7259 can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such 1) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the toner.
Page 511: Removing The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.34.6 Removing the 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 4) Disconcert the connector [1] to free it from the wire Intermediate Transfer Unit 0003-2595 guide[2]. 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. F-7-921 5) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the locking F-7-924 plate [2].
Page 512: Cleaning The Surface Of The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.34.7 Cleaning the Surface of the 3) If there is any toner [3] on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt, dry wipe it with lint free Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006-0335 paper. 1) Place the ITB unit [1] on paper for protection. F-7-926 F-7-928 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of...
Page 513: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.34.8 Removing the ITB 7.11.34.10 When Replacing the Cleaning Unit ITB Cleaning Blade 0003-2594 0005-9885 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, slide the ITB Whenever you need to replace the ITB cleaning blade, cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to be sure to go though the following steps to apply blade detach.
Page 514 Chapter 7 3) Spread the blade lubricant [1] using lint free paper 5) Mount the ITB cleaning unit [2] to the intermediate [2] as shown to cover an area of the belt about 10 cm transfer unit [1]; then, fix it in place using 2 screws [3]. wide.
Page 515: Itb Scoop Up Sheet
Chapter 7 If you have replaced the ITB cleaner blade, be sure If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] to perform the following: and the latch plate (front) 1) Execute the following service mode item (black band sequence): COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>BK BNDEX.
Page 516: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-943 F-7-946 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 517: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw open the hopper assembly [2]. [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. F-7-949 F-7-952 7.11.35.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005-7260 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 518: Removing The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly [3]. F-7-957 7.11.35.7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006-0343 F-7-955 1) Place the ITB unit [1] on paper for protection. 7.11.35.6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0003-6744...
Page 519: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.35.8 Removing the ITB 3) If there is any toner [3] on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt, dry wipe it with lint free Cleaning Unit 0003-6738 paper. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, slide the ITB cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 520: Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator
Chapter 7 7.11.36 Intermediate Transfer Belt If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) Static Eliminator 7.11.36.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0003-8268 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 521: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-969 F-7-972 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 522: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw open the hopper assembly [2]. [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. F-7-975 F-7-978 7.11.36.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005-7261 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 523: Cleaning The Surface Of The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly [3]. F-7-983 7.11.36.7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006-0342 F-7-981 1) Place the ITB unit [1] on paper for protection. 7.11.36.6 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit...
Page 524: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.36.8 Removing the ITB 3) If there is any toner [3] on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt, dry wipe it with lint free Cleaning Unit 0003-2602 paper. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, slide the ITB cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 525: Removing The Idler Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.36.10 Removing the Idler 2) Stand the intermediate transfer unit by fitting its 2 pints [2] in the 2 holes of the fixing/feeding assembly. Roller 0003-2664 Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pre transfer already removed.
Page 526: Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
Chapter 7 7.11.36.12 Removing the ITB 2) Holding the shaft of the idler roller [1], pull the roller upright to detach. Static Eliminator 0002-6352 1) Shift down the lock lever [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, pull up the roller arm [2]. 2) Free the 2 claws [3], and detach the ITB static eliminator [4].
Page 527: Ptential Sensor Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.38 Ptential Sensor Unit 5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the grounding wire [2]. 6) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the side plate 7.11.38.1 Outline 0004-5165 [4]. The potential sensor unit includes the following 4 parts: potential control PCB potential sensor potential sensor relay harness (between relay...
Page 528 Chapter 7 7.11.38.4 Releasing the Front 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Cover 0004-5169 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the front cover. slide out the right deck [2]. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 529: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.38.5 Releasing the Hopper 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Assembly 0004-5170 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-1011 F-7-1008 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2].
Page 530 Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper 5) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the left. drum fixing member [2] of the drum shift [1], remove the fixing screw [4]. 1: Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
Page 531 Chapter 7 6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward member [1]. the front. F-7-1018 F-7-1021 7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1]. 10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 532: Removing The Black Developing Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.38.7 Removing the Black 11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and fully slide out the process unit [2]. Developing Unit 0004-5172 Points to Note About the Work 1 The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover.
Page 533 Chapter 7 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the black 5) Push in the high voltage cable [1] through the developing assembly locking plate [1]. opening [2] indicated in the figure. F-7-1028 F-7-1031 3) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the black developing assembly joint plate [1].
Page 534: Atr Sensor Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.38.8 Removing the 7.11.39.2 Releasing the Front Potential Sensor Cover 0004-5173 0003-2673 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the potential 1) Open the front cover. sensor together with developing cover[2]. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 535: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the process cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2]. unit cover [2]. F-7-1037 F-7-1040 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the...
Page 536: Sliding Out The Process Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.39.4 Sliding Out the Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Process Unit 0003-2672 can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such 1) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper toner.
Page 537 Chapter 7 4) Take out the process unit cover [1] from the 2: When drawing out the process unit, be sure to find shipping box, and detach the drum stop tool [2] from out the position of the protrusion [1] of the drum the back of the cover.
Page 538 Chapter 7 8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing 11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and lever [1] in the direction of the arrow. fully slide out the process unit [2]. F-7-1053 9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward the front.
Page 539: Removing The Black Developing Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.39.5 Removing the Black 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the black developing assembly locking plate [1]. Developing Unit 0003-2668 Points to Note About the Work 1 The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover. Take full care, therefore, not to damage the developing cylinder when you have detached the developing unit.
Page 540: Patch Image Sensor
Chapter 7 7.11.39.6 Removing the ATR 5) Push in the high voltage cable [1] through the opening [2] indicated in the figure. Sensor Unit 0002-6228 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Open the clamp [2], and free the harness for the wire guide [3].
Page 541 Chapter 7 7.11.40.2 Releasing the Front 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Cover 0003-8381 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the front cover. slide out the right deck [2]. 2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
Page 542: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.40.3 Releasing the Hopper 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. Assembly 0003-8382 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. F-7-1077 F-7-1074 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2]. 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2].
Page 543: Removing The Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly
Chapter 7 7.11.40.5 Removing the Transfer 5) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the locking plate [2]. Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003-8383 1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1]. F-7-1083 F-7-1080 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 screws [2];...
Page 544: Cleaning The Surface Of The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper about 50 mm.
Page 545: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 F-7-1092 2) Stand the intermediate transfer unit by fitting its 2 pints [2] in the 2 holes of the fixing/feeding assembly. F-7-1090 Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been 7.11.40.8 Removing the ITB already removed. Cleaning Unit 0003-8385 1) Remove the 2 screws [1];...
Page 546: Idle Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.40.10 Removing the Patch 7.11.41 Idle Roller Image Reading Sensor 0003-8387 7.11.41.1 Removing the Right 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the pattern reader holder [2]. Cover (upper) 0003-8272 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 547: Removing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] the front cover strap [2]. and the latch plate (front) F-7-1102 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 548: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully bottle [2]. open the hopper assembly [2]. F-7-1105 F-7-1108 7.11.41.4 Removing the Pre Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner Transfer Charging Assembly can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the 0005-7262...
Page 549: Remove The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly [3]. F-7-1111 F-7-1114 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 550: Cleaning The Surface Of The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper about 50 mm.
Page 551: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 F-7-1122 2) Stand the intermediate transfer unit by fitting its 2 pints [2] in the 2 holes of the fixing/feeding assembly. F-7-1120 Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been 7.11.41.8 Removing the ITB already removed. Cleaning Unit 0003-2643 1) Remove the 2 screws [1];...
Page 552: Removing The Idler Roller
Chapter 7 7.11.41.10 Removing the Idler 2) Holding the shaft of the idler roller [1], pull the roller upright to detach. Roller 0003-2619 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pre transfer guide [2]. F-7-1126 When detaching the roller, take care not to damage the surface of the ITB by the roller.
Page 553: Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid
Chapter 7 7.11.42 Patch Image Reading Sensor If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) Shutter Solenoid 7.11.42.1 Remove the Right Cover (upper) 0004-5885 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 554: Releasing The Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 7) Remove the screw [1] from lower right, and detach 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner the front cover strap [2]. bottle [2]. F-7-1133 F-7-1136 8) Remove the 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner cover hinge, and fully open the front cover [2].
Page 555: Removing The Pre Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw open the hopper assembly [2]. [2]; then, detach the color toner supply cover ]3]. F-7-1139 F-7-1142 7.11.42.4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005-7263 3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 556: Cleaning The Surface Of The Intermediate Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. screws [2]; then, detach the transfer cleaner driver 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to assembly [3]. the front; when it stops, shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach.
Page 557: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit
Chapter 7 2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] about 50 mm. F-7-1151 7.11.42.8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0004-5894 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, slide the ITB F-7-1149 cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 558: Removing The Patch Image Reading Unit
Chapter 7 7.11.42.9 Removing the Patch 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable [3] from the 3 cable clamps [2]. Image Reading Unit 0004-5900 4) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the patch 1) Shift the arm [1] shown in the figure to lock it in image reading unit [5].
Page 559: Charging Wire
Chapter 7 7.11.43 Charging Wire 7.11.43.3 Stringing the Charging Wires 0002-5844 7.11.43.1 Outline All charging wires (except the grid wire) may be 0002-5835 strung in the same way, and the following shows how Around the photosensitive drum are 2 charging writes to string the charging wire of the primary charging used for primary and pre transfer charging.
Page 560: Stringing The Grid
Chapter 7 6) Hook the charging wire [2] on the charging wire 10) Mount the left and right shield plates (or, 2 lids).. positioner [1] at the rear; then, hook the charging wire 11) Mount the wire cleaner. At this time, be sure to on the hook [3] for tension.
Page 561: Adjusting The Primary Charging Wire
Chapter 7 7.11.43.5 Adjusting the 5) Cut the excess of the charging wire with nippers. 6) When you have strung the charging wire on all Primary Charging Wire 0002-5850 studs, pass its end [2] between the motor unit and the If you have to replace the primary charging wire, washer found behind the charging assembly.
Page 562 Chapter 7 7-296...
Page 563: Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System
Chapter 8 Pickup/ Feeding System...
Page 565 Contents Contents 8.1 Construction ............................... 8 1 8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................. 8 1 8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine........................8 2 8.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers ..........................8 3 8.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Path........................... 8 5 8.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ..........................8 6 8.1.6 Arrangement of Solenoids...........................
Page 566 8.10 Delivery ................................8 49 8.10.1 Overview..............................8 49 8.10.2 Face Up Delivery............................. 8 49 8.10.3 Face Down Delivery..........................8 50 8.11 Parts Replacement Procedure ......................... 8 53 8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Unit..........................8 53 8.11.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit ....................8 53 8.11.2 Cassette Pickup Motor ..........................
Page 567 Contents 8.11.12 Right Deck Pickup Assembly........................ 8 66 8.11.12.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit ..................8 66 8.11.13 Left Deck Pickup Assembly........................8 67 8.11.13.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit .................... 8 67 8.11.14 Right Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ..................8 68 8.11.14.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers..........
Page 568 Contents 8.11.28.5 Removing the Controller Box Cover ....................8 89 8.11.28.6 Removing the Controller Box......................8 90 8.11.28.7 Removing the Outside Delivery Motor ..................8 91...
Page 569: Construction
Chapter 8 8.1 Construction 8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0002-4685 The following shows the major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the pickup/feeding system: T-8-1 Item Description Remarks Method of paper front loading accommodation Method of pickup front deck (right, left) separation retard cassette (3, 4) separation retard...
Page 570: Major Divisions Of The Machine
Chapter 8 8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine 0002-4689 [10] F-8-1 [1] Registration roller assembly [2] Manual feed pickup assembly [3] Secondary transfer assembly [4] Right deck pickup assembly [5] Cassette pickup assembly [6] Left deck pickup assembly [7] Duplexing feeding assembly [8] Delivery assembly [9] Fixing assembly [10] Feeding assembly...
Page 571: Arrangement Of Rollers
Chapter 8 8.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers 0002-4701 [34] [33] [32] [31] [30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [10] [25] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] F-8-2 [1] Registration roller [2] Manual feed pull off roller [3] Manual feed roller [4] Manual feed separation roller [5] Pre registration roller...
Page 572 Chapter 8 [14] Vertical path 4 roller [15] Cassette 4 feed roller [16] Cassette 4 separation roller [17] Cassette 4 pickup roller [18] Cassette 3 pickup roller [19] Right deck pickup roller [20] Duplexing right roller [21] Secondary transfer roller [22] Duplexing confluence roller [23] Left deck separation roller [24] Left deck feed roller...
Page 573: Diagram Of The Paper Path
Chapter 8 8.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Path 0003-2745 F-8-3 [1] Manual feed pickup [2] Side paper deck pickup [3] Cassette 4 pickup [4] Cassette 3 pickup [5] Right deck pickup [6] Left deck pickup [7] Face down delivery [8] Face up delivery [9] Duplexing re pickup...
Page 574: Arrangement Of Sensors
Chapter 8 8.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors 0003-2748 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [23] [22] [21] [20] F-8-4 [1] External delivery sensor [2] Reversal sensor [3] Inside delivery sensor [4] Fixing inlet sensor [5] Post transfer sensor [6] Duplexing confluence sensor [7] Transparency sensor (front;...
Page 575 Chapter 8 [12] Vertical path 0 sensor [13] Vertical path 1 sensor [14] Right deck pickup sensor [15] Vertical path 2 sensor [16] Vertical path 3 sensor [17] Cassette 3 pickup sensor [18] Vertical path 4 sensor [19] Cassette 4 pickup sensor [20] Left deck stationary sensor [21] Left deck pickup sensor [22] Duplexing left sensor...
Page 576: Arrangement Of Solenoids
Chapter 8 8.1.6 Arrangement of Solenoids 0003-2750 F-8-5 [1] Manual feed pickup solenoid [2] Deck (right) pickup solenoid [3] Cassette 3 pickup solenoid [4] Cassette 4 pickup solenoid [5] Left deck confluence solenoid [6] Deck (left) pickup solenoid [7] Reversal shifting solenoid [8] Delivery solenoid...
Page 577: Arrangement Of Drive Mechanisms
Chapter 8 8.1.7 Arrangement of Drive Mechanisms 0003-2752 F-8-6 M4 Fixing motor M6 Manual feed pre registration motor M8 Registration motor M9 Outside delivery motor M10 Duplexing reversal motor M11 Duplexing left motor M12 Duplexing middle motor M13 Duplexing right motor M14 Right deck pull off motor M15 Vertical path motor M17 Right deck pickup motor...
Page 578: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 8.2 Basic Sequence 8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation (in response to a press on the Start key) 0005-4709 a. Right Deck <A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face up delivery> Print start STBY PRINT LSTR Right deck pickup motor (M17)
Page 579 Chapter 8 b. Cassette 3 <A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face up delivery> Print start STBY PRINT LSTR Cassette 3 pickup motor (M19) Cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS48) Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL8) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path motor (M15)
Page 580: Interval Acceleration
Chapter 8 8.2.2 Interval Acceleration 0003-2759 The machine provides 3 types of secondary transfer speed (normal, 2/3 speed, 1/3 speed) to suit the type of paper (material, weight) and the selected color mode. These speeds are in keeping with the image formation speed (276 mm/sec;...
Page 581 Chapter 8 a. between pickup and secondary transfer roller T-8-2 Normal 2/3 speed 1/3 speed Transfer speed (276 mm/sec) (184 mm/sec) (92 mm/sec) Interval A to D A to D A to D 1.8 times as fast Right deck 2.2 times as fast 2.7 times as fast (speed partly variable) *2 Feed...
Page 582 Chapter 8 T-8-3 Transfer speed Normal speed (276 mm/sec) Interval A to B B to C C to D Feed speed right deck 1.8 times speed variable speed 1.8 times speed PS31 F-8-13 A: Point of pickup B: Point of pre registration C: Point 36 mm in front of the registration sensor D: Point 20 mm in front of secondary transfer b.
Page 583 Chapter 8 T-8-5 Transfer speed Normal speed (276 mm/sec) 2/3 speed (184 mm/sc) 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec) Interval E to F F to G to H E to F F to G to H E to F F to G to H Face down equivalent to equivalent to...
Page 584: Stopping The Paper Before Registration
Chapter 8 8.2.3 Stopping the Paper Before Registration 0003-2796 The machine stops the paper before registration to prevent interference between preceding paper and following paper (otherwise occurring as the result of changes in feed speed over certain intervals). The paper is stopped at the following points (according to sources of paper). If the manual feed pickup unit is used as the source of paper or if the source of paper is the right deck and, at the same time, while the normal transfer speed is used (i.e., variable speed control is executed), paper will not be stopped before registration: T-8-7...
Page 585: Detecting Jams
Chapter 8 8.3 Detecting Jams 8.3.1 Delivery Jams 8.3.1.1 Cassette/Deck Pickup Assembly (right deck, left deck, cassette 3/4) 0003-2804 The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor in question within a specific period of time after the pickup motor goes on.
Page 586: Delay Jam (Source Of Paper Other Than Cassette/Deck)
Chapter 8 8.3.1.2 Delay Jam (source of paper other than cassette/deck) 0003-2805 The machine identifies a delay jam as follows when the source of paper is not the cassette: The machine monitors the length of time between when paper leaves the sensor N 1 and when it reaches the sensor N (i.e., the sensor used for detection), and it will identify a delay jam if the sensor N does not go on within a specific period of time after the sensor N 1 has gone on.
Page 587: Stationary Jams
Chapter 8 8.3.2 Stationary Jams 8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam 0003-2807 The sensor N does not go off within a specific period of time after it has gone on. Start key ON or print started INTR PRINT L + A L + A Jam check Normal Error...
Page 588 Chapter 8 8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power On 0003-2808 Paper exists over the following sensor before the machine starts initial multiple rotation at power on: T-8-11 Sensor Remarks Vertical path confluence sensor (PS32) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS60) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical pith 3 sensor (PS62) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS63)
Page 589: Other Jams
Chapter 8 8.3.3 Other Jams 8.3.3.1 Wrong Paper Size 0003-2809 The machine identifies a jam if it detects paper shorter than the specified size: T-8-12 Sensor Remarks Transparency sensor (front; PS3) if not transparency Transparency sensor (rear; PS29) if not transparency Registration sensor (PS9) if transparency 8.3.3.2 Wrong Material...
Page 590: Cassette
Chapter 8 8.4 Cassette 8.4.1 Overview 0003-2814 Paper is held in position inside the cassette by means of the side guide plate and the rear guide plate. The index special guide must be fitted before using an index sheet. The cassette is set to a specific paper size using the cassette size dial. F-8-20 [1] Rear guide plate [2] Side guide plate...
Page 591: Identifying Paper Sizes
Chapter 8 8.4.2 Identifying Paper Sizes 0003-2826 The size of paper inside the cassette is identified by the cassette size dial, and the result is communicated to the cassette size detection PCB. The array of 4 actuators on the cassette size detection PCB found on the machine indicates a specific state in keeping with the states (on/off) of the 4 actuators, enabling the identification of as many as 15 paper sizes.
Page 592 Chapter 8 T-8-14 (AB Configuration) Size (no cassette) 305x457mm 320x450mm(SRA3) 330x483mm T-8-15 (Inch Configuration) Size (no cassette) STMTR LTRR 11 x 17 EXEC 12 x 18 12 5/8 x 17 11/16 13 x 19 If a combination not found in the foregoing table is found, the machine will assume the absence of a cassette, and will not move up the cassette lifter.
Page 593: Setting The Universal Cassette
Chapter 8 8.4.3 Setting the Universal Cassette 0003-2832 The following is a list of default sizes identified in relation to U1 through U4: T-8-16 G LTR FLSC G LGL A LTR In addition to the foregoing default sizes, the following may be assigned in service mode: T-8-17 (Universal U1 thorough U4) Size...
Page 594: Checking The Level Of Remaining Paper
Chapter 8 8.4.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper 0003-2833 The machine uses the following sensors to check the level of remaining paper: T-8-18 Sensor Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper level sensor A PS52 PS58 Paper level sensor B PS53 PS59 Paper sensor PS50...
Page 595 Chapter 8 View Front the Front of the Machine Full of paper Cassette paper Cassette paper Paper level sensor B level sensor A Paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor B level sensor A Paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor B level sensor A Cassette paper sensor Flag...
Page 596: Cassette Pick Up Unit
Chapter 8 8.5 Cassette Pick Up Unit 8.5.1 Overview 0003-2838 The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter so that the paper remains in contact with the pickup roller. When the cassette pickup motor goes on, the pickup roller starts to rotate to pick up paper. When the cassette solenoid goes on, on the other hand, the pickup roller starts to leave the surface of paper.
Page 597: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 8.5.2 Basic Sequence 0005-4710 <A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face up delivery> Print start STBY PRINT LSTR Cassette 3 pickup motor (M19) Cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS48) Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL8) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path motor (M15)
Page 598: Movement Of The Lifter
Chapter 8 8.5.3 Movement of the Lifter 0003-2840 When the cassette is slid inside the machine, the pickup roller starts to move down and, at the same time, the sensor flag leaves the lifter sensor, thus turning on the cassette lifter motor to move up the lifter. When the lifter sensor detects the surface of paper, on the other hand, the lifter stops to move up.
Page 599: Manual Feed Pickup Unit
Chapter 8 8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit 8.6.1 Overview 0003-2845 When the manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1) goes on, the manual feed holding plate is moved up; as a result, the paper on the tray is forced against the manual feed pickup roller, causing a single sheet of paper to be picked up by the manual feed pick up tray and the separation roller.
Page 600: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 8.6.2 Basic Sequence 0005-4711 <A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, face up delivery> Print start STBY PRINT LSTR Manual pickup solenoid (SL1) Manual feed pre- registration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9)
Page 601: Identifying The Last Sheet
Chapter 8 8.6.4 Identifying the Last Sheet 0003-2853 The machine uses a secondary transfer method, which requires it to identify the last sheet so that no image will be formed on the ITB in the absence of paper. When the last paper pickup roll rotates, the slit cut into the roll causes the output of the last paper sensor (PS7) to take on a pulse wave form.
Page 602: Deck
Chapter 8 8.7 Deck 8.7.1 Overview 0003-2859 The paper inside the left/right front deck is held up by the work of the lifter so that the paper remains in contact with the pickup roller at all times. When the deck pickup motor goes on, the pickup roller starts to rotate to pick up paper. The pickup roller leaves the paper when the deck pickup solenoid (SL6, SL7) goes on.
Page 603: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 8.7.2 Basic Sequence 0005-4712 <Right Deck, A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face up delivery> Print start STBY PRINT LSTR Right deck pickup motor (M17) Right deck pickup sensor (PS33) Deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Right deck pull-off...
Page 604: Identifying The Size Of Paper
Chapter 8 8.7.3 Identifying the Size of Paper 0003-2867 The left/right front deck is not equipped with a mechanism used to identify the size of paper, and its configuration is switched in service mode. The left and right front decks may be switched to A4, B5, or LTR as follows: (1) Change the position of the paper size guide plates of the deck.
Page 605: Checking The Level Of Remaining Paper
Chapter 8 8.7.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper 0003-2869 The level of paper remaining in the left/right front deck is checked using the following sensors: T-8-21 Sensor Right deck Left deck Paper level sensor A PS37 PS44 Paper level sensor B PS38 PS45 Paper sensor...
Page 606: Registration Unit
Chapter 8 8.8 Registration Unit 8.8.1 Overview 0003-2870 The registration roller is driven by the registration motor (M8), and is turned on and off to make sure that the paper will match the image on the intermediate transfer belt. The registration assembly is equipped with 3 sensors: registration sensor (PS9), transparency sensor (front; PS3), and transparency sensor (rear;...
Page 607: Duplex Feeding Unit
Chapter 8 8.9 Duplex Feeding Unit 8.9.1 Overview 0003-2871 To move the 1st side of a double sided print, the delivery reversal solenoid (SL5) remains off and the reversing flapper is shifted up. When the paper moves past the reversal vertical path sensor (PS15) and reaches a specific point, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) stops/rotates in reverse to move the paper to the duplexing left feeding assembly.
Page 608 Chapter 8 [1] Reversal vertical path sensor (PS15) [2] Horizontal registration sensor (PS24) [3] Duplexing left sensor (PS17) [4] Duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) 1) With the delivery reversing solenoid (SL5) remaining off, the reversing flapper is in up position so that the paper moves to the reversal vertical path assembly.
Page 609 Chapter 8 3) The paper moves to the duplexing left feeding assembly, and the horizontal registration sensor (PS24) checks the horizontal registration. The paper is also butted against the duplexing left roller so that it arches. PS24 PS17 Duplex left roller Horizontal registration detection/arching F-8-40 4) When the paper moves past the duplexing left roller, it stops when its leading edge reaches a point 35 mm from...
Page 610 Chapter 8 5) A specific period of time thereafter, the duplexing left motor rotates to move the paper to the duplexing right feeding assembly and then to the registration roller assembly. Paper will never stop in the duplexing right feeding assembly.
Page 611: Detecting The Horizontal Registration Position
Chapter 8 8.9.2 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position 0003-2872 The machine executes a duplexing registration sensor home position search when the main power switch is turned on, front cover is opened/closed, manual feed unit is opened/closed, lower right cover is opened/closed, power save function is reset, or printing ends, causing the sensor to move to the point of 13x19 paper detection.
Page 612 Chapter 8 [1] Paper [2] Horizontal registration sensor (PS24) [3] Sensor plate [4] Horizontal registration motor (M28) a. Horizontal Registration Search 1) After a home position search*1, the horizontal registration sensor (PS24) moves to the 13x19 paper detection position *2. *1.
Page 613: A5, 5 Sheets In Circulation
Chapter 8 8.9.3 A5, 5 Sheets in Circulation 0003-2875 Re-pickup standby position Rotates in reverse F-8-47 F-8-48 8-45...
Page 614 Chapter 8 (10) (11) (12) F-8-49 8-46...
Page 615: A3, 3 Sheets In Circulation
Chapter 8 8.9.4 A3, 3 Sheets in Circulation 0003-2877 Rotates in reverse Re-pickup standby position F-8-50 8-47...
Page 616 Chapter 8 F-8-51 8-48...
Page 617: Delivery
Chapter 8 8.10 Delivery 8.10.1 Overview 0003-2878 The machine discharges paper either face up or face down: T-8-23 Mode of delivery Mode of operation Face up When making single print of a single original When making multiple prints of a single original (however, face down if a finisher is installed) If heavy paper 3 is selected If the source of paper is from the manual feed tray and the paper is not plain paper (default size) Face down...
Page 618: Face Down Delivery
Chapter 8 8.10.3 Face Down Delivery 0004-4320 The machine operates as follows when in face down delivery mode: 1) The delivery solenoid (SL5) is off, and the paper is moved in the direction of the duplexing feeding assembly. PS14 Rotation in normal direction F-8-53 2) A specific period of time after the reversal sensor (PS14) goes on, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) rotates in normal direction;...
Page 619 Chapter 8 3) In 100 msec, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) rotates in reverse to move the paper with the trailing edge first in the direction of delivery. Rotation in reverse F-8-55 4) When the leading edge of preceding paper moves past the curl removing roller by 20 mm, the reversal shifting solenoid (SL3) goes on to move away the reversal 1 roller in preparation for the arrival of the following paper.
Page 620 Chapter 8 5) The length of overlap between the trailing edge of the preceding paper and the leading edge of the following paper is 42 mm at maximum. *1. The length of overlap between the trailing edge of the preceding paper and the leading edge of the following paper is 42 mm at maximum.
Page 621: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 8 8.11 Parts Replacement 8.11.2 Cassette Pickup Motor Procedure 8.11.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) 0003-6626 8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Unit 1) Remove the 2 screws [1],and detach the right cover (lower rear) [2]. 8.11.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 0002-9785 1) Slide out the cassette 3/4.
Page 622: Cassette Lifter Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.2.3 Removing the Waste 8.11.2.4 Removing the Cassette Toner Bottle Base Pickup Motor 0003-6628 0003-6634 1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1]. 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup motor [3]. F-8-63 F-8-65 2) Remove the 7 screws [1], and lift the waste toner...
Page 623: Left Deck Lifter Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.3.2 Removing the DC 8.11.3.3 Removing the Cassette Power Supply Unit Lifter Motor 0003-5799 0003-5800 1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and free the harness 1) Slide out the cassette 3 or 4. [2]. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [3];...
Page 624: Right Deck Lifter Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.4.2 Removing the DC 8.11.4.3 Removing the Left Power Supply Unit Deck Lifter Motor 0003-6676 0003-6677 1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and free the harness 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 [2]. screws [2]; then, detach the left deck lift motor [3]. F-8-71 F-8-73 2) Disconnect the 16 connectors [1], and open the 3...
Page 625: Removing The Right Deck Lifter Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.5.2 Removing the Rear 2) Remove the 7 screws [1], and lift the waste toner bottle base [2] to detach it in the direction of the Cover (lower) 0003-6656 arrow. 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (lower) [2].
Page 626: Left Deck Pickup Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.6 Left Deck Pickup Motor 2) Disconnect the 16 connectors [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2] to free the harness [3]. 3) Remove the 4 screws [4], and detach the DC power 8.11.6.1 Removing the Rear supply unit [5].
Page 627: Right Deck Pickup Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.7 Right Deck Pickup Motor 8.11.7.3 Removing the Waste Toner Bottle Base 0003-6649 8.11.7.1 Removing the Right 1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1]. Cover (lower rear) 0003-6647 1) Remove the 2 screws [1],and detach the right cover (lower rear) [2].
Page 628: Vertical Path Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.7.4 Removing the Right 8.11.8.2 Removing the Rear Deck Pickup Motor Cover (lower) 0003-6650 0004-1076 Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover screws [2]; then, detach the right deck pickup motor (lower) [2].
Page 629: Right Deck Pull Off Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.9 Right Deck Pull Off Motor 2) Remove the 7 screws [1], and lift the waste toner bottle base [2] to detach it in the direction of the arrow. 8.11.9.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) 0004-1078 1) Remove the 2 screws [1],and detach the right cover (lower rear) [2].
Page 630: Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A
Chapter 8 8.11.9.3 Removing the Waste 8.11.9.4 Removing Right Deck Toner Base Pull Off Motor 0004-1077 0004-1080 1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1]. 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the right deck pull off motor [3].
Page 631 Chapter 8 8.11.10.2 Removing the DC 8.11.10.3 Removing Power Supply Unit Cassette Lifter Motor 0003-5802 0003-5803 1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and free the harness 1) Slide out the cassette 3 or 4. [2]. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [3];...
Page 632: Left Deck Paper Level Sensor
Chapter 8 8.11.11 Left Deck Paper Level 4) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2]. Sensor 8.11.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower) 0003-6669 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (lower) [2].
Page 633: Removing The Power Cord Base
Chapter 8 8.11.11.3 Removing the Power 3) Disconnect the 8 connectors [1], and open the wire saddle [2]. Cord Base 0004-5216 1) Remove the 4 screws [1] from the left side. F-8-109 F-8-107 4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the AC driver box [2].
Page 634: Right Deck Pickup Assembly
Chapter 8 8.11.11.4 Removing the Left 8.11.12 Right Deck Pickup Assembly Deck Paper Level Sensor 0003-6673 8.11.12.1 Removing the Right 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the sensor base [3]. Deck Pickup Unit 0002-9781 1) Slide out the right deck.
Page 635: Left Deck Pickup Assembly
Chapter 8 7) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the pickup 4) Lift the left deck compartment [1] to detach. unit (right deck) [1]. F-8-119 5) Put back the 2 rails [1] into the machine. F-8-116 8.11.13 Left Deck Pickup Assembly 8.11.13.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit 0002-9541...
Page 636: Right Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller
Chapter 8 8.11.14 Right Deck Pickup/Feed/ 8) Slide out the fixing/freeing assembly. 9) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the pickup Separation Roller fixing plate [2] 8.11.14.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup, Feed, Separation Rollers 0003-8601 1) Slide out the right deck. 2) From both sides of the deck compartment [1], remove the 2 screws each [2];...
Page 637: Left Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller
Chapter 8 8.11.15 Left Deck Pickup/Feed/ 4) Free the hook [1], and pull out the pickup roller [2]. 5) Remove the resin ring [3], and pull out the feed Separation Roller roller [4]. 6) Remove the resin ring [5], and pull out the 8.11.15.1 Removing the Left separation roller [6].
Page 638: Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller
Chapter 8 8.11.16 Cassette Pickup/Feed/ 5) Free the hook [1], and pull out the pickup roller [2]. 6) Remove the resin ring [3], and pull out the feed Separation Roller roller [4]. 7) Remove the resin ring [5], and pull out the 8.11.16.1 Removing separation roller [6].
Page 639: Manual Feed Unit
Chapter 8 8.11.17 Manual Feed Unit 4) Lift the manual feed unit [1] to detach. 8.11.17.1 Removing Manual Feed Unit 0002-9702 1) Open the manual feed unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cover [2]. F-8-138 8.11.18 Manual Feed Roller 8.11.18.1 Removing Manual Feed Roller...
Page 640: Manual Feed Separation Roller
Chapter 8 4) Remove the resin ring [1], and pull out the feed 3) Remove the feeder upper cover [1]. roller [2] to the front. F-8-141 F-8-143 8.11.19 Manual Feed Separation 4) Remove the resin ring [1], and pull out the feed roller [2] to the front.
Page 641: Manual Feed Pre Regustration Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.20 Manual Feed Pre 2) As in step 1), detach the paper guide (middle) [1]. Reference: When attaching the paper guide (middle), Regustration Motor try pushing down on the separation roller shaft [2] to facilitate the work. 8.11.20.1 Removing the Rear Cover (upper) 0003-8323 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1].
Page 642: Removing The Right Cover (Upper Rear)
Chapter 8 8.11.20.2 Removing the Right 8.11.20.4 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear) Cover (lower rear) 0003-8300 0003-8305 1) Detach the reader communications cable [1]. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1],and detach the right cover 2) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the right cover (lower rear) [2].
Page 643: Removing The Dc Controller Box
Chapter 8 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and slide the DC 3) Lift the DC controller box [1] to detach. controller box [2] to the left. F-8-157 F-8-154 8.11.20.7 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller 8.11.20.6 Removing the DC 0005-7217 Controller Box 0003-8714...
Page 644 Chapter 8 8.11.20.8 Removing the HV1 2) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1], and free the harness from the 6 cable guides [2]. 0003-6524 1) Free the 2 hooks [1], and detach the HV1 transformer lid [2]. F-8-161 3) Free the harness [1] from the 2 cable guides [2]; then, remove the screw.
Page 645: Manual Feed Pre Registration Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.20.9 Manual Feed Pre 4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle cover [2]. Registration Motor 0003-6525 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, move the manual feed pre registration motor [3] to the right to detach F-8-166 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2];...
Page 646 Chapter 8 8.11.21.2 Removing 7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing assembly [1]. Horizontal Registration Unit 0003-7968 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the handle [2]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the fixing/ feeding front cover [4].
Page 647: Registration Motor
Chapter 8 5) Remove the screw [1] from the front side. 9) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and open the wire guide [2]. 10) Remove the screw [3], and slide the horizontal registration unit [4] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 648 Chapter 8 5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing/ 8) Remove the 2 screws [1], and shift the fixing/ feeding upper cover [2]. feeding driver PCB [2] toward the front to detach. F-8-179 F-8-182 6) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1], and open the 3 8.11.22.2 Removing wire saddles [2].
Page 649: Removing The Fixing/Feeding Driver Pcb
Chapter 8 8.11.23 Horizontal Registration 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing front cover [3]. Motor 8.11.23.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003-7979 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 650 Chapter 8 8.11.23.2 Removing 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly [2]. Horizontal Registration Unit 0003-7978 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the handle [2]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the fixing/ feeding front cover [4]. F-8-189 When lifting the fixing assembly, be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm [1] so...
Page 651: Horizontal Registration Motor
Chapter 8 5) Remove the screw [1] from the front side. 9) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and open the wire guide [2]. 10) Remove the screw [3], and slide the horizontal registration unit [4] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 652: Duplex Reversal Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.24 Duplex Reversal Motor 8.11.24.2 Removing Duplexing Reversal Motor 0004-1086 8.11.24.1 Removing the Fixing 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the duplexing reversal motor Front Cover 0004-1085 [3]. 1) Open the font cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 653: Removing The Duplexing Left Motor
Chapter 8 5) Remove the knob [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and open the 3 wire detach the fixing front cover [3]. saddles [2]. 4) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the duplexing left motor [4] together with its base.
Page 654: Duplex Middle Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.26 Duplex Middle Motor 6) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2]. 8.11.26.1 Removing Fixing/Feeding Driver PCB 0004-1082 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the handle [2]. 4) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the fixing/ feeding front cover [4].
Page 655: Duplex Right Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.26.2 Removing 5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing/ feeding upper cover [2]. Duplexing Middle Motor 0004-1081 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the duplexing middle motor [3]. F-8-213 6) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2].
Page 656: Outside Delivery Motor
Chapter 8 8.11.28 Outside Delivery Motor 8) Remove the 2 screws [1], and shift the fixing/ feeding driver PCB [2] toward the front to detach. 8.11.28.1 Removing the Left Cover (upper) 0003-6681 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the left cover (upper) [2].
Page 657: Removing The Left Cover (Middle)
Chapter 8 8.11.28.3 Removing the Left 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (upper) [2]. Cover (middle) 0003-6683 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover (middle) [3]. F-8-222 8.11.28.5 Removing...
Page 658 Chapter 8 8.11.28.6 Removing Controller Box 0003-6687 1) Disconnect the 9 connectors [1]. F-8-228 3) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to fix the main F-8-225 controller box in place. F-8-226 F-8-229 2) Free the harness from the 3 harness retainers [1]. F-8-230 F-8-227 F-8-231...
Page 659 Chapter 8 8.11.28.7 Removing 4) Slide the main controller box [1] toward the delivery side to detach. Outside Delivery Motor 0003-6688 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws; then, detach the outside delivery motor [3]. F-8-232 F-8-234 During removal/mounting, be sure to take care not to damage the connector [2] found at the joint to the DC controller PCB.
Page 660 Chapter 8 8-92...
Page 661: Chapter 9 Fixing System
Chapter 9 Fixing System...
Page 663 Contents Contents 9.1 Construction ............................... 9 1 9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................. 9 1 9.1.2 Major Components ............................9 2 9.1.3 Construction of the Control System ......................9 5 9.2 Basic Sequence..............................9 6 9.2.1 Sequence of Operation at Power On ......................9 6 9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation (printing) ......................
Page 664 9.6.5 Fixing Thermistor (Upper) ........................9 36 9.6.5.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly ......................9 36 9.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor..................... 9 37 9.6.5.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor ............9 38 9.6.6 Fixing Thermistor (Lower) ........................9 38 9.6.6.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly ......................
Page 665: Construction
Chapter 9 9.1 Construction 9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0003-2879 The following shows the major functions of the fixing system: T-9-1 Item Description Method of fixing by heating roller Fixing heater on fixing roller side 2 pc. (main heater, sub heater) on pressure roller side 1 pc.
Page 666: Major Components
Chapter 9 9.1.2 Major Components 0003-2881 The following shows the major components of the fixing system: T-9-2 Component Notation Description Diameter of fixing roller 60 mm Diameter of pressure roller 60 mm Diameter of outside heating roller 36 mm Fixing main heater halogen heater;...
Page 667 Chapter 9 [17] [10] [13] [16] [14] [18] [8] [11] [15] [21] [20] [9] [12] [19] F-9-1 [16] [10] [13] [17] [22] [11] [12] [20] [14] [15] F-9-2...
Page 668 Chapter 9 T-9-3 Fixing roller [12] Pressure sub thermistor Pressure roller [13] Outside heating sub thermistor Outside heater roller [14] Fixing thermal switch Fixing main heater [15] Pressure thermal switch Fixing sub heater [16] Outside heating thermal switch Pressure heater [17] Cleaning web Outside heating roller heater...
Page 669: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 9 9.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0003-2884 The following shows the major components of the fixing system: MAIN_HEAT_ON J1105-A2 J1810-18 DC controller PCB AC driver PCB MAIN_TR_ERR J1105-A3 J1810-17 SUB_HEAT_ON J1810-16 J1105-A4 SUB_TR_ERR J1810-15 J1105-A5 PRESS_HEAT_ON J1810-13 J1105-A7 PRESS_TR_ERR J1810-12 J1105-A8...
Page 670: Basic Sequence
Chapter 9 9.2 Basic Sequence 9.2.1 Sequence of Operation at Power On 0003-2886 The machine starts WMUPR1 (fixing idle rotation) when the surface temperature of the outside heating roller reaches 190 deg C. It then starts WMUP2 (start up sequence) when the fixing roller exceeds 200 deg C, the pressure roller exceeds 140 deg C, and the outside heating roller exceeds 225 deg C, at the end of which it enters the standby state.
Page 671: Basic Sequence Of Operation (Printing)
Chapter 9 9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation (printing) 0003-2887 a. Mono Color (Black), Single Sided - Fixing roller: 200 deg C - pressure roller: 140 deg C or higher - Outside heating roller: 225 edge C When above is true, starts standby. Stat key STBY PRINT...
Page 672 Chapter 9 c. Full Color - Fixing roller: 200 deg C - pressure roller: 140 deg C or higher - Outside heating roller: 225 edge C When above is true, starts standby. Stat key STBY PRINT LSTR STBY Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub Controlled to 200 deg.
Page 673: Various Control Mechanisms
Chapter 9 9.3 Various Control Mechanisms 9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller 9.3.1.1 Controlling the Speed According to Paper Type 0003-2889 The machine controls the fixing roller to any of 3 speeds according to paper yep. T-9-4 Paper type Fixing speed Mono color print plain paper...
Page 674 Chapter 9 Memo: If you changed the setting in service mode(*), the particulars of the down sequence table may not be as shown below: for instance, if '1' (priority on fixing) is selected, the down sequence start temperature tends to be slightly higher;...
Page 675 Chapter 9 c. 120/230 V Model, A4 Paper, Room Temperature of 20 deg C or Higher T-9-7 Heavy paper 3/ Plain paper Heavy paper 1 Heavy paper 2 transparency deg C deg C deg C deg C Initial Initial Initial Initial Stop Stop...
Page 676: Controlling The Fixing Roller Temperature
Chapter 9 9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature 9.3.2.1 Overview 0003-2893 Each of the heat rollers of the fixing assembly is controlled based on the output of the main thermistor mounted in contact with the center of the roller. The sub thermistor mounted in contact with the edge of the roller is used to detect overheating at the edge of the roller, which can occur when small size paper (e.g., A4R) is move past continuously.
Page 677 Chapter 9 9.3.2.2 At Power On 0003-2894 The fixing roller is heated by the fixing main heater (H1) and the fixing sub heater (H2), while the pressure roller is heated by the pressure heater (H3). The outside heating roller, on the other hand, is heated by the outside heating roller heater (H4).
Page 678 Chapter 9 *1: As many as 3 heaters may be turned on at a time during warm up (other than during start up sequence WMUP2). To start up the rollers in the shortest time possible under this limit, the fixing heater (H1) and the pressure heater (H3) are turned on alternately.
Page 679: When Producing Mono Color (Black) Single Sided Prints
Chapter 9 9.3.2.4 When Producing Mono Color (Black) Single Sided Prints 0003-2896 A roller tends to be deprived of heat as a result of contact with paper while the machine is making mono color single sided prints (especially in continuous printing). The machine, therefore, uses the fixing main heater (H1), which has high output, and executes temperature control at 200 deg C.
Page 680: When Producing Full Color Prints
Chapter 9 *1: Rotates at normal speed (276 mm /sec). *2: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *3: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *4: In the case of the 120/230 V model, the 400 W heater is turned on at 200 W equivalent during printing (by turning the pressure heater on and off for every single cycle of the power supply using the control signal generated by the DC controller).
Page 681: External Heat Roller Drive Control
Chapter 9 9.3.2.7 With Power Save Mode Enabled 0004-3516 The following shows the temperature to which the individual rollers of the fixing assembly are controlled when the machine enters low power mode or power save mode, with the lengths of time between when the power save mode is disabled and when the machine enters the standby (STBY) state.
Page 682 Chapter 9 When the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C during warm up or when last rotation ends, the outside heating roller shift motor goes on (in reverse direction of rotation) to move the outside heating roller away from the fixing roller.
Page 683: Fixing Cleaning Web Mechanisms
Chapter 9 9.4 Fixing Cleaning Web Mechanisms 9.4.1 Overview 0003-2900 The cleaning web used to clean the fixing upper roller is fed by means of a one way clutch (fixing web solenoid SL2). The web is fed coinciding with the detection of the leading edge of paper by the registration sensor (PS9) while printing is under way.
Page 684: Web Retaining Mechanism
Chapter 9 When the web detecting lever moves off the web at the cut off, the lever that has been blocking the web length sensor (PS20) moves away from the sensor, thus causing the machine to indicate a pre warning(*1) to alert the user that the web is running out.
Page 685 Chapter 9 The machine indicates the message "Printer is warming up..." on its LCD while it executes last rotation after printing. While the message is on the LCD, the fixing roller is under temperature control, and the outside heating roller is in contact with the fixing roller, i.e., the web retaining pad is away from the web.
Page 686: Protective Functions
Chapter 9 9.5 Protective Functions 9.5.1 Detecting Overheating Using Thermistors 0003-2901 The main thermistor and the sub thermistor of individual rollers may detect any of the following temperatures; in response, the DC controller issues signals to cut off the heater drive circuit, thereby depriving the heaters of power. T-9-11 Main (middle) Sub (end)
Page 687 Chapter 9 E002 (inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing assembly) The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) has an open circuit or poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3) has an open circuit. The heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit. the AC rive PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Page 688: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 9 Parts Replacement 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing front cover [3]. Procedure 9.6.1 Fixing Unit 9.6.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0002-9347 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right F-9-22 to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 689 Chapter 9 9.6.1.2 Points to Note When Mounting 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly [2]. the Fixing Assembly 0002-9355 When fitting the fixing assembly into the fixing/ feeding assembly, take full care not to damage the 2 sensors [1].
Page 690 Chapter 9 4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle 7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing cover [2]. assembly [1]. F-9-32 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly F-9-29 [2].
Page 691: Removing The Fixing Upper Heater
Chapter 9 9.6.2.2 Removing the Fixing 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the heater retainer [2]. Upper Heater 0003-3903 1) Remove the screw [1], and shift the thermistor cover [2] to detach. F-9-35 2) Remove the faston [1] of the heater. F-9-38 5) Remove the 4 screws [1], and move the heater harness [2] out of the way.
Page 692: Removing The Fixing Roller
Chapter 9 9.6.2.3 Removing the Fixing 4) Remove the 2 wires [1], and detach the fixing roller [2] together with the gear and the bearing. Roller 0003-3904 1) Remove the screws [1], and pull out the pin while pushing down on the fixing assembly. F-9-43 F-9-40 2) Remove the screw [1], and pull out the pin [2];...
Page 693: Points To Note When Removing The Fixing Roller
Chapter 9 When mounting the gear you have removed previously, be sure that the protrusion [1] of the gear To detach the paper after the work, go thorough the is toward the front of the machine. following sequence: close the fixing assembly, while pushing the fixing assembly downward, fit 2 pins, tighten the screws, and then pull on the paper to detach.
Page 694 Chapter 9 4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle 7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing cover [2]. assembly [1]. F-9-53 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly F-9-50 [2].
Page 695: Removing The Fixing Lower Heater
Chapter 9 9.6.3.2 Removing the Fixing 5) Remove the screw [1], and free the heater harness [2]. Lower Heater 0003-3912 6) Remove the screw [3], and detach the heater 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the heater retainer [4]; then, pull out the heater [5]. terminal cover [2].
Page 696: Points To Note When Mounting The Pressure Roller
Chapter 9 9.6.3.4 Points to Note When 2) Remove the screw [1], and pull out the pin; then, open the fixing assembly. Mounting the Pressure Roller 0005-8186 Be sure to mount the pressure roller [1] so that the lot number [2] found on its edge is found toward the front of the machine.
Page 697 Chapter 9 4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle 7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing cover [2]. assembly [1]. F-9-69 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly F-9-66 [2].
Page 698: Removing The Outside Heating Roller Heater
Chapter 9 9.6.4.2 Removing the Outside 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and free the 2 heater harnesses [2] from the wire guide [3]. Heating Roller Heater 0002-9918 1) Engage the ends of the 2 springs [1] on the hooks [2] of the side plate.
Page 699 Chapter 9 5) Remove the screw [1]. 11) Pull the heater [2] out of the outside heating roller 6) Remove the screw [2], and detach the wire guide [1]. [3]. 7) Remove the screw [4], and detach the heater retainer [5]. F-9-78 When mounting the outside heating roller heater, F-9-76...
Page 700: Removing The Outside Heating Roller
Chapter 9 9.6.4.3 Removing the Outside 4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle cover [2]. Heating Roller 0003-2560 1) Detach the ring [1], bush [2], and bearing [4] from both ends of the outside heating roller [1]; then, detach the outside heating roller.
Page 701 Chapter 9 9.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing 7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing assembly [1]. Upper Thermistor 0002-9923 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the thermistor cover [2]. F-9-85 F-9-88 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly [2].
Page 702: Points To Note When Mounting The Fixing Upper Thermistor
Chapter 9 9.6.5.3 Points to Note When 9.6.6 Fixing Thermistor (Lower) Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor 9.6.6.1 Removing the Fixing 0005-5541 Assembly 0003-2547 After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the 1) Open the front cover. following: 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 703: Removing The Fixing Lower Thermistor
Chapter 9 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly detach the fixing front cover [3]. [2]. F-9-95 F-9-98 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 3 connectors [2];...
Page 704: Points To Note When Mounting The Fixing Lower Thermistor
Chapter 9 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the inlet guide 6) Remove the 2 screws [1], and free the harness [2] [2]. from the 2 wire saddles [3]. F-9-104 F-9-101 9.6.6.3 Points to Note When 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness Mounting the Fixing Lower [2] from the 2 wire saddles [3].
Page 705 Chapter 9 9.6.7 External Heat Thermistor 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing front cover [3]. 9.6.7.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003-2549 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 706: Removing The Outside Heating Roller Thermistor
Chapter 9 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2]. [2] from the wire saddle[3]. F-9-112 F-9-115 When lifting the fixing assembly, be sure to take 3) Free the harness [1] from the wire saddle [2]; then, care not to touch the web length detecting arm [1] so remove the screw [3], and detach the thermistor that the arm will be free of damage.
Page 707: Points To Note When Mounting The External Heat Thermistor
Chapter 9 9.6.8 Fixing Thermal Switch 5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the thermistor [2] from the thermistor mounting plate [3]. 9.6.8.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003-2550 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right F-9-118 to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 708: Removing The Fixing Thermal Switch
Chapter 9 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly detach the fixing front cover [3]. [2]. F-9-123 F-9-126 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 3 connectors [2];...
Page 709: Points To Note When Mounting The Fixing Thermal Switch
Chapter 9 9.6.9 Fixing Locking Thermal Switch 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the wire guide [3]. 3) Remove the 2 fastons [4]. 9.6.9.1 Removing the Fixing 4) Remove the screw [5], and detach the thermal Assembly 0003-2551 switch [6].
Page 710 Chapter 9 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly detach the fixing front cover [3]. [2]. F-9-134 F-9-137 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 3 connectors [2];...
Page 711: Removing The Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch
Chapter 9 9.6.9.2 Removing the Fixing 9.6.9.3 Points to Note When Pressure Thermal Switch Mounting the Fixing Pressure 0003-0172 Thermal Switch 0004-5057 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the 4 wire saddles [3]. After mounting the thermal switch (before mounting the inlet guide), check to make sure o the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel...
Page 712 Chapter 9 9.6.10 Thermal Switch 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing front cover [3]. 9.6.10.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003-2552 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 713: Removing The Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch
Chapter 9 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and free the 2 heater [2]. harnesses [2]. 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the thermal switch. F-9-149 F-9-152 When lifting the fixing assembly, be sure to take 9.6.10.3 Points to Note When care not to touch the web length detecting arm [1] so Mounting the Outside Heating...
Page 714 Chapter 9 9.6.11 Upper Fixing Heater 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing front cover [3]. 9.6.11.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003-2555 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 715 Chapter 9 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly 2) Remove the faston [1] of the heater. [2]. F-9-163 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the heater cover F-9-160 [2] while moving the heater harness [3] out of the way. When lifting the fixing assembly, be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm [1] so that the arm will be free of damage.
Page 716 Chapter 9 5) Remove the 4 screws [1], and move the heater 4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle harness [2] out of the way. Remove the 2 screws [3], cover [2]. and detach the heater cover [4]. Then, detach the heater [5].
Page 717 Chapter 9 9.6.12.2 Removing the Fixing 7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing assembly [1]. Lower Heater 0003-3917 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the heater terminal cover [2]. F-9-171 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly [2].
Page 718 Chapter 9 5) Remove the screw [1], and free the heater harness 4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle [2]. cover [2]. 6) Remove the screw [3], and detach the heater retainer [4]; then, pull out the heater [5]. F-9-179 F-9-177 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2];...
Page 719 Chapter 9 9.6.13.2 Removing the Outside 7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing assembly [1]. Heating Roller Heater 0003-2561 1) Engage the ends of the 2 springs [1] on the hooks [2] of the side plate. F-9-182 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly [2].
Page 720 Chapter 9 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and free the 2 heater 5) Remove the screw [1]. harnesses [2] from the wire guide [3]. 6) Remove the screw [2], and detach the wire guide [3]. 7) Remove the screw [4], and detach the heater retainer [5].
Page 721 Chapter 9 9.6.14 Fixing Web 11) Pull the heater [2] out of the outside heating roller [1]. 9.6.14.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003-2543 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
Page 722 Chapter 9 5) Remove the screw [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, 8) Holding the 2 grips [1], detach the fixing assembly detach the fixing front cover [3]. [2]. F-9-195 F-9-198 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 3 connectors [2];...
Page 723: Removing The Fixing Web Unit
Chapter 9 9.6.14.2 Removing the Fixing 9.6.14.3 Removing the Fixing Web Unit 0003-2541 0002-9569 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the 2 fixings upper cover [2]. [2]; then, detach the fixing web [3]. F-9-202 F-9-200 9.6.14.4 Attaching the Fixing...
Page 724: When Replacing The Fixing Web
Chapter 9 9.6.14.5 When Replacing the 5) Remove the knob [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing front cover [3]. Fixing Web 0002-9572 1. After attaching the web, take up its slack so that there will be no slack when the web unit is fitted in the fixing assembly.
Page 725: Removing The Outside Heating Roller Shift Motor
Chapter 9 9.6.16 External Heater Shift Motor 9.6.16.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Shift Motor 0003-7985 9.6.16.1 Removing the Fixing 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 3 connectors [2]; then, after shifting the timing belt [3] Front Cover 0003-7984 to the front, detach it together with the fixing motor 1) Open the font cover.
Page 726: Removing The Delivery Upper Separation Claw
Chapter 9 9.6.17 Upper Separation Claw 6) Turn the separation claw [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, free the hook of the spring [2] to detach it in upward direction. 9.6.17.1 Removing the Delivery Upper Separation Claw 0003-2571 1) Open the front cover.
Page 727 Chapter 9 5) Detach the spring [1] from the rear of the delivery 7) Remove the screw [1], and detach the leaf spring assembly. [2]. F-9-219 8) Free the hook of the spring [1], and detach the lower separation claw [2]. F-9-217 6) Remove the screw [1] from the front of the delivery assembly;...
Page 728 Chapter 9 9-64...
Page 729 Chapter 10 Externals and Controls...
Page 731 Contents Contents 10.1 Control Panel..............................10 1 10.1.1 Overview ..............................10 1 10.1.2 LCD Processing............................10 2 10.1.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment........................10 2 10.1.4 Control Panel CPU ..........................10 2 10.2 Counters................................10 3 10.2.1 Overview ..............................10 3 10.2.2 Increasing the Count..........................10 6 10.3 Fans ................................
Page 732 10.5.6 Leakage Breaker ............................ 10 27 10.5.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower)....................10 27 10.5.6.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower)....................10 27 10.5.6.3 Removing the Power Cord Base..................... 10 27 10.5.6.4 Removing the Leakage Breaker...................... 10 28 10.5.7 Fixing Relay............................10 29 10.5.7.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower)....................
Page 733 Contents 10.5.18 Power Supply Cooing Fan........................10 46 10.5.18.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower) ....................10 46 10.5.18.2 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ..................10 46 10.5.18.3 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan ................... 10 46 10.5.19 Delivery Cooling Fan 1 ........................10 47 10.5.19.1 Removing the Left Cover (upper) ....................
Page 734 Contents...
Page 735 Chapter 10 10.1 Control Panel 10.1.1 Overview 0003-2955 The machine' s control panel consists of PCBs, LCD, and touch panel as shown below, and its functions include the following: LCD display contrast adjustment touch switch input processing hard key input processing Main controller PCB J1212A, J1212B J511A, J511B...
Page 736 Chapter 10 10.1.2 LCD Processing 0003-2956 The CPU on the main controller PCB sends data (display information) to the control panel CPU PCB according to the instructions at such times as programmed. The data goes through the control panel CPU PCB for display on the color LCD. 10.1.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment 0003-2957 The machine' s keypad PCB is equipped with a contrast adjustment volume (VR6801) to enable the user to adjust...
Page 737 Chapter 10 10.2 Counters 10.2.1 Overview 0003-2959 The machine is equipped with counters used to keep count of prints according to output functions; the counters are indicated on the control panel in response to a press on the Check key on the panel. The following shows the counters and the settings made at time of shipment from the factory: T-10-1 Model...
Page 738 Chapter 10 T-10-5 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 230V total 1 total (black copy + print (full copy + print (full total (mono total 1 (double and white 1) color; large) color; small) color 1) sided) T-10-6...
Page 739 Chapter 10 T-10-10 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 230V total 1 total (full color + total (full color + total (black and total (black and scan (total 1)) mono color; large) mono color; small) white;...
Page 740 Chapter 10 10.2.2 Increasing the Count 0003-2960 The machine increases the count based on the type of print (single sided or double sided) and the presence/absence of a finisher. a. Single Sided Print, 2nd Side of a Double Sided Print When making a single sided print or the 2nd side of a double sided print, the machine increases the count when the trailing edge of paper is discharged outside the machine (as indicated by the output of the following sensor).
Page 741 Chapter 10 10.3 Fans 10.3.1 Overview 0003-2962 The following shows the names and functions of the fans used in the machine: T-10-13 Notation Name Filter 2 speed Description error control primary charging suction fan draws air from outside the machine E824 to the primary charging assembly.
Page 742 Chapter 10 FM11 FM12 FM14 FM13 FM10 F-10-2 10-8...
Page 743: Sequence Of Operations
Chapter 10 10.3.2 Sequence of Operations 0005-4704 The machine uses the following sequence of operation to turn on or off the fans: Main power Control panel Main power switch ON power switch OFF switch OFF Last Sleep Initial multiple Power save Warm-up Printing Standby...
Page 744 Chapter 10 10.4 Power Supply 10.4.1 Power Supply 10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer Unit 0003-2965 The machine's DC power supply is controlled by the printer power supply PCB. The power to accessories is also controlled by the printer power supply PCB. The following shows the functions of PCBs associated with power supply: T-10-14 Name...
Page 745 Chapter 10 Interlock 13 VA; AC-Relay-ON Drawer connector 430W AC driver Fixing main heater(H1) Thermal switch 400W Power Fixing sub heater(H2) plug 400W Thermal switch Fixing Noise Leakage Locking heater(H3) heater relay filter breaker drive 400W Thermal switch External extra-heat heater(H4) 100V,15A 120V,20A 230V,15A...
Page 746 Chapter 10 T-10-15 Operating mode Main power switch Sleep Low power Door open Fixing error Print* Main power switch all night 13VB non all 13VA night 24VA 1 24VA 2 24VA 3 30VA 3 DC relay AC relay * same is true for standby, warm up, and recovery. 10-12...
Page 747 Chapter 10 10.4.1.2 Power to the Environment Heater 0003-9458 13VA: non-all night 13V Environment switch PCB Environment Cassette heater switch switch AC Driver PCB 13VA RL1 N.O. Cassette heater (H7) N.C. Side deck CST_HEAT_ON heater DRUM_HEAT_ON Drum heater (H5) 13VA RL2 N.O.
Page 748 Chapter 10 b. Environment Switch ON T-10-17 Operating mode Main power OFF Sleep Low power Standby Printing Main power OFF Cassette heater switch Drum Heater half half half half full full full full half half wave wave wave wave wave wave wave wave...
Page 749: Protection Function
Chapter 10 10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 2 0003-9715 The following shows the rating and the power supply tolerances of the DC/DC converter PCB: T-10-20 Output 30VA 3 All night/non all night non all night Rated output Tolerance +/ 5% 10.4.3 Protection Function...
Page 750 Chapter 10 Fuse notation Rating Reference voltage Load DC power supply FU101 6.3A/250V 200VAC DC power supply PCB PCB (200 V) DC/DC converter FU500 5A/24V 13VDC 3.3V DC/DC convert pickup (on DC/DC PCB 1 convert PCB 1) DC power supply FU801 2A/60V 12VDC...
Page 751 Chapter 10 10.4.4 Backup Battery 10.4.4.1 Backup Battery 0003-2969 The SRAM PCB and the DC controller PCB of the machine's main controller PCB are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) serving as a backup source of power in the event of a power shortage or when the power plug is disconnected.
Page 752 Chapter 10 10.5 Parts Replacement If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front) Procedure 10.5.1 Hopper Drive Unit 10.5.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper) 0003-6708 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 753 Chapter 10 10.5.1.3 Releasing the Hopper 5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. Assembly 0003-6710 6) Push the release button [1] of the right deck, and 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]. slide out the right deck [2]. F-10-13 F-10-10 2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner...
Page 754: Drive Assembly
Chapter 10 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. 2) Close the hopper assembly. 3) Remove the E ring [1]. F-10-16 F-10-19 4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully 4) Open the hopper assembly, and lift it to detach. open the hopper assembly [2].
Page 755 Chapter 10 10.5.2 Power Cord Base 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach h pipe cover [2]. 10.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower) 0004-5212 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (lower) [2]. F-10-21 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the toner feed pipe [2].
Page 756 Chapter 10 10.5.2.3 Removing the Power 3) Disconnect the 8 connectors [1], and open the wire saddle [2]. Cord Base 0004-5214 1) Remove the 4 screws [1] from the left side. F-10-28 F-10-26 4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the AC driver box [2].
Page 757 Chapter 10 10.5.3 Control Panel Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such 10.5.3.1 Removing the Right toner. Cover (upper) 0003-8234 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right cover (upper) [2].
Page 758: Left Cover
Chapter 10 10.5.3.3 Removing the Reader 2) Remove the 4 screws [1]. Left Cover 0003-8243 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader left cover [2]. F-10-38 3) Slide the control panel [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 759 Chapter 10 10.5.4 DC Controller PCB 10.5.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover (upper) 0003-8322 1) Free the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3]. F-10-42 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and slide the DC controller box [2] to the left.
Page 760 Chapter 10 10.5.4.4 Points to Note When 10.5.5 Printer Power Supply PCB Mounting the DC Controller 10.5.5.1 Removing the Rear 0005-7177 Cover (lower) 0003-8325 During assembly work, be sure to connect the 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: (lower) [2].
Page 761 Chapter 10 10.5.6.2 Removing the Left 2) Disconnect the 16 connectors [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2] to free the harness [3]. Cover (lower) 0003-8288 3) Remove the 4 screws [4], and detach the DC power 1) Remove the 2 grip covers [1]. supply unit [5].
Page 762: Removing The Leakage Breaker
Chapter 10 2) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and open the 3 4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the AC driver wire saddles [2]. box [2]. F-10-52 F-10-54 3) Disconnect the 8 connectors [1], and open the wire 10.5.6.4 Removing the Leakage saddle [2].
Page 763: Relay Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.7 Fixing Relay 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the DC/DC converter PCB2 [2]. 10.5.7.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower) 0004-5252 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (lower) [2]. F-10-59 10.5.8 Relay PCB 10.5.8.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower) 0003-6695...
Page 764: Removing The Relay Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.8.2 Removing the Relay 10.5.9.2 Removing the DC Relay 0003-6696 0004-1296 1) Disconnect the 20 connectors [1], and remove the 6 1) Remove the 8 fastons [1]. screws [2]; then, detach the relay PCB [3]. 2) Pull the leaf spring [2] to the front, and detach the relay [3].
Page 765: Removing The Right Cover (Upper Rear)
Chapter 10 10.5.10.3 Removing the Right 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover (upper) [2]. Cover (upper rear) 0003-8297 1) Detach the reader communications cable [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the right cover (upper rear) [3].
Page 766 Chapter 10 10.5.10.5 Removing the HV1 6) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1], and free the cable from the cable guide [2]. 0003-8715 1) Open the 3 wire saddles [1], and free the 2 cables [2]. 2) Remove the screw [3]. 3) Release the hook [4].
Page 767: Detaching The Left Cover (Upper)
Chapter 10 10.5.11 HV2 PCB 10.5.11.3 Removing the Left Cover (middle) 0003-6980 10.5.11.1 Detaching the Left 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover Cover (upper) 0003-6978 (middle) [3]. 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the left cover (upper) [2].
Page 768: Removing The Secondary Transfer Unit
Chapter 10 10.5.12 HV3 PCB 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cooling fan [2] together with its base. 10.5.12.1 Removing Secondary Transfer Unit 0004-0910 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) While pushing the 2 hooks [1] frond on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, slide out the fixing/ feeding assembly [2] fully.
Page 769 Chapter 10 10.5.12.2 Removing the HV3 5) Disconnect the connector [1]. 0004-0911 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the registration guide unit [3]. F-10-81 6) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1]. F-10-84 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cover [2]. F-10-82 7) While shifting the secondary transfer unit [1], disconnect the 2 connectors [2];...
Page 770: Removing Fixing/Feeding Driver Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.13 Fixing/Feed Driver PCB 6) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2]. 10.5.13.1 Removing Fixing/ Feeding Driver PCB 0003-7006 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the handle [2]. 4) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the fixing/ feeding front cover [4].
Page 771: Fixing/Feeding Driver Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.13.2 Fixing/Feeding 10.5.14.2 Removing the DC Driver PCB Power Supply Unit 0003-7025 0003-5796 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing/ 1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and free the harness feeding driver PCB [2]. [2].
Page 772: Removing The Switch Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.14.3 Removing Pickup 10.5.15.2 Removing the Left Driver PCB Cover (lower) 0003-5797 0003-6692 1) Disconnect the 7 connectors [1], remove the 5 1) Remove the 2 grip covers [1]. screws [2], and free the PCB support [3]; then, detach 2) Remove the 6 screws [2], and detach the left cover the pickup drive PCB [4].
Page 773: Primary Exhaust Fan
Chapter 10 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the switch PCB 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2]. (upper) [2]. F-10-100 F-10-102 10.5.16 Primary Exhaust Fan 10.5.16.2 Removing the Right 10.5.16.1 Removing the Rear Cover (Upper rear) 0003-6580 Cover (upper)
Page 774: Removing The Dc Controller Box
Chapter 10 10.5.16.3 Sliding 10.5.16.4 Removing the DC Control Box Controller Box 0003-6581 0003-8711 1) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the DC 1) Open the 3 cable guides [1], and free the harness controller cover [2]. [2]. F-10-106 2) Disconnect the 33 connectors [1], and open that 13 F-10-104 cable guides [2];...
Page 775: Points To Note When Mounting The Dc Controller Box
Chapter 10 10.5.16.5 Points to Note When 10.5.16.6 Removing Mounting the DC Controller Primary Exhaust Fan 0003-6583 0005-7216 1) Disconnect the connect [1], and open the 2 cable guides [2]. During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2].
Page 776: Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
Chapter 10 3) Open the cable guide [1], and remove the 2 screws 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2]; then, detach the primary exhaust fan [3]. (upper) [2]. F-10-114 F-10-112 10.5.17.2 Removing the Rear 10.5.17 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan Cover (lower) 0003-6602...
Page 777: Removing The Left Cover (Middle)
Chapter 10 10.5.17.3 Removing 10.5.17.5 Removing Delivery Cover Controller Box Cover 0003-6605 0003-6609 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the controller cover [2]. box cover [2]. F-10-118 F-10-116 10.5.17.4 Removing the Left Cover (middle) 0003-6607...
Page 778: Removing The Controller Box
Chapter 10 10.5.17.6 Removing Controller Box 0003-6612 1) Disconnect the 9 connectors [1]. F-10-123 3) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to fix the main F-10-120 controller box in place. F-10-121 F-10-124 2) Free the harness from the 3 harness retainers [1]. F-10-125 F-10-122 F-10-126...
Page 779: Removing The Fixing/Delivery Fan
Chapter 10 4) Slide the main controller box [1] toward the 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 5 delivery side to detach. screws [2]; then, detach the duct [3]. F-10-127 F-10-130 During removal/mounting, be sure to take care not 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 to damage the connector [2] found at the joint to the screws [2];...
Page 780: Power Supply Cooing Fan
Chapter 10 10.5.18 Power Supply Cooing Fan 2) Disconnect the 16 connectors [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2] to free the harness [3]. 3) Remove the 4 screws [4], and detach the DC power 10.5.18.1 Removing the Rear supply unit [5].
Page 781: Delivery Cooling Fan 1
Chapter 10 10.5.19.2 Removing 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the power supply cooling fan Delivery Cover 0004-1046 [3]. 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cover [2]. F-10-136 10.5.19 Delivery Cooling Fan 1 F-10-138 10.5.19.1 Removing the Left 10.5.19.3 Removing the Left...
Page 782: Delivery Cooling Fan 2
Chapter 10 10.5.19.4 Removing 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the cable guide [3]. Delivery Cooling Fan 1 0004-1048 4) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the delivery 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness cooling fan 1.
Page 783: Ozone Filter
Chapter 10 10.5.21 Ozone Filter 5) Remove the knob [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fixing front cover [3]. 10.5.21.1 Removing the Ozone Filter 0003-3764 1) Remove the face cover [1] from the right cover (upper rear). F-10-144 10.5.20.2 Removing...
Page 784: Toner Filter
Chapter 10 3) Detach the ozone filter [2] from the filter holder [1]. 2) Remove the fixing heat discharge ozone filter[1]. F-10-150 F-10-148 10.5.22 Toner Filter 10.5.21.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Ozone Filter 0005-0740 10.5.22.1 Removing the Toner 1) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover Filter 0003-4092 (lower) [2].
Page 785: Sub Toner Filter
Chapter 10 10.5.23 Sub Toner Filter 2) Pull out the filter holder [1]. 10.5.23.1 Removing the Left Cover (upper) 0005-7956 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the left cover (upper) [2]. F-10-152 3) Detach the toner filter [2] from the filter holder [1]. F-10-154 10.5.23.2 Removing...
Page 786: Removing The Sub Toner Filter
Chapter 10 10.5.23.3 Removing the Left 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the delivery cooling fan [2] together with its base. Cover (middle) 0005-7959 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 2) Remove the 5 screws [2], and detach the left cover (middle) [3].
Page 787: Chapter 11 Maintenance And Inspection
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection...
Page 789 Contents Contents 11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts..........................11 1 11.1.1 Overview ..............................11 1 11.1.2 Reader Unit.............................. 11 1 11.1.3 Printer Unit .............................. 11 2 11.2 Durables and Consumables ..........................11 3 11.2.1 Overview ..............................11 3 11.2.2 Reader Unit.............................. 11 3 11.2.3 Printer Unit ..............................
Page 791: Periodically Replaced Parts
Chapter 11 11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 11.1.1 Overview 0002-9397 Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis for the machine to maintain a specific level of performance. They must be replaced regardless of the presence/absence of external changes or damage, as the performance of the machine will be considerably affected once they fail.
Page 792: Printer Unit
Chapter 11 11.1.3 Printer Unit 0002-9400 T-11-1 as of March 2004 Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Interval Remarks Ozone filter FC5 2486 000 250,000 images* Toner filter FL2 0554 000 250,000 images* Primary charging wire FB4 3687 000 500,000 images* Charging wire cleaner 1 FL2 2427 000 500,000 images*...
Page 793: Durables And Consumables
Chapter 11 11.2 Durables and Consumables 11.2.1 Overview 0005-8047 Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more over the period of machine warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the table of estimated lives (expressed in terms of the number of prints they make).
Page 794: Printer Unit
Chapter 11 11.2.3 Printer Unit 0002-9470 T-11-2 as of March 2004 Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Interval Remarks Feed roller (manual feed) FB1 8581 000 120,000 prints Separation roller (manual feed) FB5 0873 000 120,000 prints ITB cleaner scoop up sheet FL2 0411 000 150,000 prints Secondary transfer static eliminator holder...
Page 795: Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
Chapter 11 11.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 0003-4125 As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 150,000 prints. Check with the Service Book before setting out for a scheduled service visit, and take parts for which replacement is expected.
Page 796: Scheduled Servicing (Reader Unit)
Chapter 11 5) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass. 6) Make test copies. 7) Make sample copies. 8) Check the operation of the leakage breaker. With the power switch at ON, push the test switch of the leakage breaker to see that it operates normally (i.e., the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side to cut off the power).
Page 797: Scheduled Servicing (Printer Unit)
Chapter 11 11.3.3 Scheduled Servicing (printer unit) 0003-4126 Do not use solvents or oils other than those permitted. T-11-5 Unit Location Item Interval Remarks Externals and controls Ozone filter replace 250,000 images Externals and controls Toner filter replace 250,000 images [1]Toner filter [2]Ozone filter 11-7...
Page 798 Chapter 11 Unit Location Item Interval Remarks Externals and controls Dust collecting filter clean 250,000 prints (primary) inside of the right upper cover Laser exposure system Dust colleting glass clean 250,000 prints Charging assembly Primary charging replace 1,000,000 images assembly Charging assembly Primary charging wire clean...
Page 799 Chapter 11 Unit Location Item Interval Remarks Photosensitive drum Drum heater sliding clean/ 1,000,000 images area lubricate Clean the terminal [1] of the slip ring using alcohol; then, apply a small amount of lubricant (FY9 6008). Photosensitive drum Shifting the adjustment 250,000 imags photosensitive drum...
Page 800 Chapter 11 Unit Location Item Interval Remarks Color developing Developing cylinder clean 250,000 images assembly bushing Color developing Bottle cover clean 250,000 images assembly Color developing Color toner cartridge clean 250,000 images assembly placement sensor window [1]Color toner cartridge placement sensor window Intermediate transfer Patch image sensor...
Page 801 Chapter 11 Unit Location Item Interval Remarks Intermediate transfer Scoop up sheet base, clean 150,000 prints assembly area thereunder Intermediate transfer Cleaner container, clean 150,000 prints assembly area hereunder [1]Scoop up sheet base, thereunder [2]Cleaner container, hereunder Secondary transfer Secondary transfer rear clean 150,000 prints assembly...
Page 802 Chapter 11 Unit Location Item Interval Remarks Fixing assembly Pressure thermistor clean 150,000 prints replace 500,000 prints Fixing assembly Outside heating roller clean 150,000 prints thermistor replace 500,000 prints Fixing assembly Fixing thermal switch clean 300,000 prints replace 1,000,000 prints Fixing assembly Pressure thermal switch clean...
Page 803: Shifting The Photosensitive Drum Phase
Chapter 11 11.3.4 Shifting the Photosensitive Drum Phase 0006-0350 The photosensitive drum can develop drum memory unless the image write start position is shifted at specific intervals. Be sure to shift the drum phase every so many copies/prints have been made as shown below. <Overview of the Work>...
Page 804 Chapter 11 2. Mechanical Work 2 1 Open the front cover. 2 2 Shift down the fixing/feeding release lever [1], and draw out the fixing/feeding assembly [2] to the front. F-11-2 2 3 Open the color toner supply cover [1]. Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the process cover [3]. F-11-3 2 4 Remove the screw [1], and shift down the primary transfer roller locking lever [2] (so that the primary transfer roller is freed).
Page 805 Chapter 11 2 5 Check to find out the position of the marking [2] on the drum flange in relation to the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member. (checking the drum phase) In the figure, the marking [2] on the drum flange is at "." on the left and ".." on the right in relation to the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member.
Page 806 Chapter 11 2 6 Hold down the drum fixing member [1] using the drum stop tool [2]: then, using a screwdriver, remove the drum fixing screw [3]. As shown, be sure to remove the screw only after matching the protrusion [4] of the drum stop tool against the cut off [5] of the drum flange.
Page 807 Chapter 11 1: When fixing the tool to the flange, be sure to turn the drum only after matching the protrusion [2] of the tool against the cut off [1] of the drum flange. F-11-10 2: The drum phase position is identified by means of a marking of 1 to 4 dots on the flange. At time of shipment from the factory, dent A in the drum shaft is between "."...
Page 808 Chapter 11 3: Do not shift the drum phase as part of normal work involving drawing out of the process unit. 2 8 After fitting the drum fixing member [2] to the drum flange [1], hold it down from above using the drum stop tool [3].
Page 809 Chapter 11 The following figure shows a label with a check mark indicating that the work has been performed. 1. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 16 2. COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF = 1 4. COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DR-P-ADJ = OK 5.
Page 810 Chapter 11 2. message switchover mode associated with the foregoing counter: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DRM DISP Particulars Use it to enable/disable the indication of the foregoing count reading: Settings:0 to 2 0: disable indication 1: indicate in service mode only (factory default) 2: indicate both on User screen and in service mode 3.
Page 811: Cleaning
Chapter 11 11.4 Cleaning 11.4.1 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Rear Guide 0004-6732 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Wipe the ribs one by one by moving lint free paper moistened with alcohol in the direction of the arrow in the figure.
Page 812: Cleaning The Registration Roller, Registration Guide, And Transparency Sensor
Chapter 11 11.4.2 Cleaning the Registration Roller, Registration Guide, and Transparency Sensor 0005-6999 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Push the leaf springs on both sides, and slide the fixing/feeding assembly farther out. 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and turn overt the transparency upper sensor unit [2]. F-11-16 4) Remove the paper lint building up over the transparency sensor [1] using a blower brush.
Page 813 Chapter 11 5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding spring [2]. 6) Remove the screw [3]. F-11-18 7) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the registration roller upper stay [3] together with the grounding spring [4] while freeing the spring [2] off its hook.
Page 814 Chapter 11 10) Turn the upper registration roller [1] and the lower registration roller [2] to clean them with lint free paper moistened with alcohol. F-11-21 11-24...
Page 815: Chapter 12 Standards And Adjustments
Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments...
Page 817 Contents Contents 12.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ....................... 12 1 12.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1 ..................... 12 1 12.1.2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2 ..................... 12 3 12.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3 ..................... 12 4 12.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4 ..................... 12 5 12.1.5 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5 .....................
Page 818 12.6.12 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor............12 40 12.6.13 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor ............12 41 12.7 Electrical Components..........................12 41 12.7.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ..................12 41 12.7.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ....................
Page 819: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
Chapter 12 12.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 12.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1 0005-4335 The image adjustment basic procedure consists of the following steps: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1 START Turn off the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0' Is the image better? See*1 To image adjustment basic procedure 2...
Page 820 Chapter 12 <At the End of the Work> When done, go through he following so that the machine is ready to generate images of optimum quality. 1) Enable the potential control mechanism in service mode (set '1' to the following, and execute the item: COPIER>option>PO CNT).
Page 821: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2
Chapter 12 12.1.2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2 0005-4336 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2 <Check the Primary / Grid output> Image adjustment basic procedure 2 Turn off the potential control mechanism: Is the difference between the actual measurement of COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0' GRID-CNT and the foregoing value B within +/-10%? Measure the voltage PR-CNT at...
Page 822: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3
Chapter 12 12.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3 0005-4337 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3 <Check the Laser output> Image adjustment basic procedure 3 Turn on the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '1' Make the following selections in service mode, and set '1' : Unconditional execution COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC.
Page 823: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4
Chapter 12 12.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4 0005-4338 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4 <Check the Developing output> Image adjustment basic procedure 4 Turn on the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '1' Is the fault in a color or in the black? Color Measure the voltage DEV_CL_DC_CONT Measure the voltage DEV_DC_CONT at...
Page 824: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5
Chapter 12 12.1.5 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5 0005-4339 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5 <Check the Primary transfer output> Image adjustment basic procedure 5 Is the toner image on Replace the photosensitive the photosensitive drum drum. before transfer normal? Turn off the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0' Measure the voltage TR1CONT at J1132B-8 found on the DC controller PCB during black printing operation.
Page 825: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 6
Chapter 12 12.1.6 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 6 0005-4340 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 6 <Check the Secondary output> Image adjustment basic procedure 6 Turn off the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0' Measure the voltage 2TRCONTP at J1119B-13 found on the DC control PCB during black printing operation.
Page 826: Potential Control Conversion Table
Chapter 12 12.1.7 Potential Control Conversion Table 0005-4608 Potential Control Conversion Table T-12-1 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) 1.031 1395.5 99.4 1.078 1388.9 98.9 1.125 1382.3 11.1 98.5 1.172 1375.7...
Page 827 Chapter 12 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) 2.438 1198.2 129.5 72.3 114.7 18.5 85.4 2.484 1191.6 133.8 74.7 118.5 19.1 84.9 2.531 1185 122.2 19.6 84.4 2.578 1178.4 142.2 79.4...
Page 828 Chapter 12 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) 4.031 974.6 273.4 152.3 242.4 37.4 69.5 4.078 277.6 154.6 246.2 37.9 4.125 961.4 281.9 249.9 38.5 68.5 4.172 954.8 286.1 159.3 253.7...
Page 829 Chapter 12 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) 5.625 417.3 232.3 370.1 56.2 53.6 5.672 744.4 421.5 234.6 373.9 56.8 53.1 5.719 737.8 425.7 377.7 57.4 52.7 5.766 731.2 239.3 381.4...
Page 830 Chapter 12 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) 7.219 527.4 561.1 312.2 497.9 75.1 37.7 7.266 520.8 565.4 314.6 501.6 75.7 37.2 7.313 514.2 569.6 316.9 505.4 76.2 36.8 7.359 507.6...
Page 831 Chapter 12 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) 8.813 303.8 392.2 625.6 21.8 8.859 297.2 709.2 394.6 629.3 94.5 21.3 8.906 290.6 713.5 396.9 633.1 95.1 20.9 8.953 717.7 399.3 636.9...
Page 832 Chapter 12 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) 10.406 80.2 848.9 472.2 753.3 112.8 10.453 73.6 853.1 474.5 757.1 113.4 10.5 857.3 476.9 760.8 113.9 10.547 60.4 861.6 479.2 764.6 114.5...
Page 833 Chapter 12 Control voltage Primary Color Black Primary Secondary Grid (V) (uA) development (V) development (V) transfer (uA) transfer (uA) Outside of Outside of Outside of Outside of 11.578 warranty warranty warranty warranty Outside of Outside of Outside of Outside of 11.625 warranty warranty...
Page 834: Image Adjustments
Chapter 12 12.2 Image Adjustments Left/Right Non Image Width 2.5+1.5mm/-1.5mm 12.2.1 Image Position 0003-8718 The margin and the non image width of a printout made at 100% magnification must be as follows: Leading Edge Margin 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm [double-sided copy, 2nd side:4.0+1.5/-1.0mm] F-12-10 12.2.2 Checking the Image Position...
Page 835: Cassette
Chapter 12 12.2.3 Cassette COPIER > ADJUST > FEED ADJ > RG REFE 0003-8720 decrease the setting of REGIST. Make prints using the cassettes 3 and 4 as the source (an increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm) of paper, and check to make sure that the left/right double-sided copy, 2nd side:4.0+1.5/-1.0mm Paper leading edge...
Page 836: Manual Feed Tray
Chapter 12 12.2.4 Manual Feed Tray 12.2.5 Front Deck 0003-8721 0003-8722 Make copies using the manual feed tray as the source Make prints using the right deck and left deck as the of paper, and check to make sure that the left/right source of paper, and check to be sure that the left/ margin is as indicated.
Page 837 Chapter 12 4) Check to make sure that the left/right margin of the 10) Close the left deck; when the gap is gone, slide out printouts on paper from the left deck is as indicated. the left deck once again, and tighten the 4 screws you 5) As necessary, make the following adjustments: loosened in step 9).
Page 838: Scanning System
Chapter 12 12.3 Scanning System 6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover 12.3.1 After Replacing the 8) Close the right deck. If the gap between the front cover/cassette 3 front CCD Unit 0003-9936 cover and the front right cover is appreciable, perform...
Page 839: After Replacing The Copyboard Glass
Chapter 12 12.3.2 After Replacing the 12.3.3 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass Reader Controller PCB or 0003-8724 Initializing the RAM 0003-8726 If you have replaced the copyboard glass, be sure to enter the bar code value indicated in the upper Be sure to generate the latest P PRINT printout right of the copyboard glass using the following before replacing the reader controller PCB.
Page 840 Chapter 12 b. service label settings (label attached behind reader 1) Enter the settings indicated on the P PRINT unit front cover) printout you have previously generated for the following items: b 1 image read start position adjustment (x direction; a.
Page 841: Laser Exposure System
Chapter 12 12.4 Laser Exposure System 12.5 Image Formation System 12.4.1 After Replacing the 12.5.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner 0004-2103 Black Developing Unit 1) Make the following selections in service mode, and 0004-2117 press the OK key: Be sure to perform the following whenever you have COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC.
Page 842: Replacing The Color Developing Unit
Chapter 12 Turn polarity positioning plate 3) Even out the starter by shaking the container about counterclockwise by a single index (5 deg); then, 10 times. tighten the screw [2] to fix it in place. 4) Open the lid [2] of the starter bottle [1]; then, remove the middle lid [3], and close the lid.
Page 843 Chapter 12 7) Supply the remaining half of the starter around the Force down the lid against the container so that the stirring screw inside the color developing unit. gap [1] indicated in the figure is small enough to 8) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times once again so prevent insertion of a transparency.
Page 844: Replacing The Starter Of The Color Developing Unit
Chapter 12 12.5.4 Replacing the Starter of the if for the M developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET M Color Developing Unit 0004-0874 if for the C developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET C 1) Remove the color developing unit. if for the CMY developing assemblies, 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 4 hooks [2];...
Page 845 Chapter 12 4) Turn back over the developing unit, and turn the 9) Pour the starter along the length of the stirring developing gear in the direction in which the cylinder screw inside the color developing unit so that it is normally turns so that the agent will drop into the about half full.
Page 846 Chapter 12 14) Attach the developing assembly lid you removed When tightening the screw, take care so that the in step 2), making sure that the lid is oriented as shavings from the developing unit or its lid will not shown.
Page 847: After Replacing The Primary Charging Assembly
Chapter 12 12.5.5 After Replacing the Primary 12.5.8 After Replacing the Pre Charging Assembly Transfer Charging Wire 0004-2166 0004-9316 If you have replaced the primary charging assembly, 1) Clean the charging wire and the shielding plates. be sure to make the following adjustments: 2) Execute the following in service mode (pre transfer 1) Check the settings indicated on the primary charging...
Page 848 Chapter 12 2) Apply an appropriate amount of blade lubricant [1] 4) Turn the drive gear [1] in he direction of the arrow as if to sprinkle it over an area of the surface as shown. so that the area of blade lubricant [2] is found as shown.
Page 849 Chapter 12 6) Turn the drive gear [3] until the area [2] of blade The fine particle of toner under the blade edge can lubricant is no longer visible on the intermediate put the blade out of alignment, allowing toner on the transfer belt [1].
Page 850 Chapter 12 12.5.12 Replacing 5. Be sure to tighten the screws [1] on the cleaning blade in the order indicated in the figure. Photosensitive Drum 0004-8937 If you have replaced the photosensitive drum, be sure to go through the following: 1) Remove the drum heater and the drum heater PCB;...
Page 851 Chapter 12 12.5.13 Points to Note 3. Check the drum phase label [1] attached behind the process unit cover. When Replacing the Drum Heater 0006-1891 Drum memory can occur if the phase of the drum is changed, as when replacing the drum heater. Take full care not to change the phase of the drum during the work by making sure of the following: 1.
Page 852: Points To Note When Replacing The Drum Heater Pcb
Chapter 12 4. Be sure to fit the drum fixing member [1] to the 2. When attaching the drum flange, be sure to fix it in drum flange [2] in correct relation to the phase place with a screw where it was found in step 1. location indicated on the drum phase label.
Page 853 Chapter 12 12.5.15 After Repacking See the following sample. The cell with a check mark [1] indicates the present drum phase location. In the ITB 0004-4225 this case, the marking [3] is located in relation to the protrusion [2] of the drum fixing member with its left When you have replaced the ITB belt, be sure to execute the following service mode item.
Page 854 Chapter 12 <Cleaning Procedure> 2) Clean the rollers [1] and the inside scraper [2] using 1) Place the ITB cleaner drive unit [1] with its cover alcohol. facing down; then, stand the ITB unit [2]. F-12-69 F-12-70 12-36...
Page 855: Fixing System
Chapter 12 12.6 Fixing System 12.6.1 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Assembly 0004-1594 When fitting the fixing assembly into the fixing/ feeding assembly, take full care not to damage the 2 sensors [1]. F-12-71 When you have replaced the primary transfer roller, be sure to execute the following service mode item.
Page 856: Points To Note When Mounting The Pressure Roller
Chapter 12 12.6.4 Position of the 12.6.5 Points to Note When Fixing inlet Guide Mounting the Pressure 0004-2213 Roller 0005-8345 Do not loosen the screw on the inlet guide base [1], as you would have to adjust the position of the Be sure to mount the pressure roller [1] so that the lot guide if you detached it.
Page 857: Adjusting The Position Of The Feeding Web Solenoid (Sl2)
Chapter 12 12.6.7 Adjusting the Position of the Feeding Web Solenoid (SL2) 0004-2616 F-12-79 Pull on the solenoid [1], and tighten the screw [4] 12.6.9 Points to Note When while making sure that the lever [2] is in firm contact with the plate at a specific point [3].
Page 858: Points To Note When Mounting The Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch
Chapter 12 12.6.10 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch 0004-5060 After mounting the thermal switch, check to be sure of the following: F-12-84 The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the outside heating roller. (Be sure to shine the thermal witch switch a pen light.) If not, re mount it.
Page 859: Electrical Components
Chapter 12 12.7 Electrical Components 12.6.13 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat 12.7.1 When Replacing the Thermistor 0005-5551 Reader Controller PCB 0003-9937 After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the following: Be sure to generate the latest P PRINT printout before replacing the reader controller PCB.
Page 860: After Replacing The Dc Controller Pcb
Chapter 12 b. service label settings (label attached behind reader 2) Make adjustments using the following items: unit front cover) a. ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment FEEDER>FUNCTION>SENS INT b 1 image read start position adjustment (x direction; b. tray width adjustment for fixed reading) AB system: FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY A4 and COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ XY>ADJ X...
Page 861 Chapter 12 12.7.3 Points to Note When Mounting COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>(all items) COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>(all items) the DC Controller PCB/ DC COPIER>ADJUST>V CONT>(all items) Controller Box COPIER>ADJUST>HV PRI>(all items) 0005-7222 COPIER>ADJUST>HV TR>(all items) COPIER>ADJUST>FEED ADJ>(all items) During assembly work, be sure to connect the COPIER>ADJUST>CST ADJ>(all items) harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: COPIER>ADJUST>MISC>(ATM...
Page 862: After Replacing The Main Controller Pcb (Main)
Chapter 12 12.7.4 After Replacing the Main 12.7.5 After Repacking the Controller PCB (main) SRAM Board 0004-1717 0004-1721 After mounting the main controller PCB (main), be be sure to inform the sure that replacing the sure to mount the PCBs you may have removed before SRAM board will lead to the loss of all image data replacing the main controller PCB: held in Boxes, and obtain his/her consent before...
Page 863: When Replacing The Hv2 Pcb
Chapter 12 software, and then perform extra steps: 12) Check to see that the machine operates normally. 1) Format the HDD. Make copies using a sure card that has been registered Start up in safe mode (i.e., by turning on the main using NSA;...
Page 864 Chapter 12 12.8 Pickup/Feeding System 12.7.8 When Replacing the ATR Sensor/Patch Image 12.8.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Read Sensor 0004-4764 Registration After Replacing the If you have replaced the ATR sensor/patch image read Pickup Cassette sensor, be sure to execute the following: 0003-9954 1) Replace the contents of the color developing unit Make prints using the cassettes 3 and 4 as the source...
Page 865: Adjusting The Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration
Chapter 12 12.8.2 Adjusting the Manual 12.8.3 Adjusting the Front Feed Pickup Horizontal Deck Pickup Horizontal Registration Registration 0003-9955 0003-9957 Make copies using the manual feed tray as the source Make prints using the right deck and left deck as the of paper, and check to make sure that the left/right source of paper, and check to be sure that the left/ margin is as indicated.
Page 866 Chapter 12 4) Check to make sure that the left/right margin of the 10) Close the left deck; when the gap is gone, slide out printouts on paper from the left deck is as indicated. the left deck once again, and tighten the 4 screws you 5) As necessary, make the following adjustments: loosened in step 9).
Page 867: Registering The Paper Width Basic Value
Chapter 12 12.8.4 Registering the Paper 6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Close the upper right cover and the lower right Width Basic Value 0003-9967 cover 8) Close the right deck. 1) Turn on the main power switch. If the gap between the front cover/cassette 3 front 2) Register the A4R paper width basic value as cover and the front right cover is appreciable, perform...
Page 868 Chapter 12 12-50...
Page 869 Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images...
Page 871 Contents Contents 13.1 Making lnitial Checks ............................ 13 1 13.1.1 Checking the Site Environment....................... 13 1 13.1.2 Checking the Paper..........................13 1 13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper......................13 1 13.1.4 Checking the Durables ..........................13 1 13.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts....................13 1 13.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks .....................
Page 872 13.3.2.6.3 Stray Toner ..........................13 51 13.3.2.6.4 Oil Lines in Vertical Direction ....................13 52 13.3.2.6.5 Soiling as Dots at Drum Intervals ................... 13 52 13.3.2.6.6 Horizontal Line Caused by Impact from the Developing Rotary ........... 13 54 13.3.2.6.7 Soiling in the Form of a Ring ....................13 56 13.3.2.7 Ghost / Memory ..........................
Page 873: Making Lnitial Checks
13.1.2 Checking the Paper 0001-6076 a. Check to see if the paper is of a type recommended by Canon. b. Check to see if the paper is dry. If moist, try paper fresh out of package. 13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper 0001-6077 a.
Page 874 Check the feed guide for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation. Check the paper for a bent leading edge, curling, waving, and moisture. As necessary, try transparencies of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem, if any, is corrected. <Machine>...
Page 875 Chapter 13 <General> Check to see that the power plug is connected properly. Check to see that there is the rated AC voltage at the power outlet. Check to see that the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids operate normally. Check the connectors for poor contact.
Page 876: Test Print
Chapter 13 13.2 Test Print 13.2.1 Overview 0001-6108 The machine offers the following 6 types of test prints (TYPE), each designed for identification of a specific type of image fault. The data for these test prints is prepared by the main controller: if the output of a test print is free of the fault in question, suspect a fault on the PDL input or the reader unit.
Page 877 Chapter 13 13.2.4 16 Gradation (TYPE=4) 0001-6113 Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white line, and uneven density at the front/rear. a. Gradation If the 16 gradation[1] is not properly produced, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system. b.
Page 878 Chapter 13 13.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5) 0001-6115 Use this test print to check a transfer fault, black line, white line, and uneven density at specific intervals. Memo: You can print out test prints for individual colors by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG and then COLOR Y/M/C/K.
Page 879 Chapter 13 13.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) 0001-6117 Use this text print to check color displacement, right angles, and straight lines. a. Color Displacement If color displacement is found, suspect a scar in the ITB and a fault in the drum unit. b.
Page 880 Chapter 13 13.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10) 0001-6118 Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among colors, and white lines associated with development. a. Solid Density of Individual Colors and Balance Among Colors the density must not be appreciably low (too light).
Page 881 Chapter 13 13.2.8 64 Gradation (TYPE=12) 0001-6119 Use this test print to check the gradation of Y, M, C, and Bk at once. F-13-5 13.2.9 Full Color 16 Gradation (TYPE=14) 0001-6120 Use this test print to check the gray balance, gradation of individual colors (YMCBk), and fogging. a.
Page 882: Troubleshooting
Chapter 13 13.3 Troubleshooting 13-10...
Page 883 Chapter 13 13.3.1 Symptoms 13.3.1.1 Symptoms 0005-4102 T-13-2 Item Symptoms Solid black / Poor contact of connectors around process unit Image fault Overall light image on black area, uneven image Low density / Poor contact of connectors around process unit Uneven Density Along the Leading Edge in a Solid Color Image Uneven Density in the Form of a Feedscrew in Color Images Uneven Density in Halftone Images...
Page 884 Chapter 13 Item Symptoms Malfunction Fixing Web Displacement / 0A15/020D Jam Code Abnormal Noise from the Rotating Rotary Frequent DF Reading Glass Cleaning Message Frequent DF reading Glass Cleaning Message (user requesting disabling of the message) Jam (Main Unit) 0103/0104 Jam Code Neuissiedler large size/RA3 pickup fault Error code E020/E021/E061/E070/E078/E820 Error Code / Poor contact of connectors around process unit...
Page 885 Chapter 13 13.3.1.2 Maintenance Recommendations Components Around Photosensitive Drum/Intermediate Transfer Unit in the Event of an Image Fault 0006-0542 If any of the following image faults has occurred as the result of wear on any of the durable components around the photosensitive drum or the intermediate transfer unit, refer to the tables that follow for guidance;...
Page 886 Chapter 13 <Cause> Wear on Primary Transfer Roller, Soiling Inside ITB Unit T-13-4 Field with high Field with low Parts name (work) Servicing intervals labor cost labor cost Photosensitive drum (dry wiping) images with spots Photosensitive drum cleaning blade 195,000 images replace replace Photosensitive drum scoop up sheet...
Page 887 Chapter 13 Field with high Field with low Parts name (work) Servicing intervals labor cost labor cost Photosensitive drum cleaner scoop up sheet 150,000 prints clean clean (lower) Photosensitive drum cleaner assembly (lower) 150,000 prints clean clean Pre transfer charging assembly rail 195,000 images clean clean...
Page 888: Image Faults
Chapter 13 13.3.2 Image Faults 13.3.2.1 Solid Image 13.3.2.1.1 Solid black / Poor contact of connectors around process unit 0005-9759 For details of error codes, see the following: E020 0080/E020 0180/E020 0280/E020 0380/E020 0090/E020 0190/E020 0290/E020 0091/E020 0191/E020 0291/E020 0092/E020 0192/E020 0292/E020 0392/E020 00A0/E020 01A0/E020 02A0/E020 03A0/E020 00A1/ E020 01A1/E020 02A1/E020 03A1/E020 00A2/E020 01A2/E020 02A2/E020 03A2/E020 00A3/E020 01A3/ E020 02A3/E020 03A3/E021 0001/E021 0002/E061 0005/E061 0007/E070 0000/E070 0001/E070 0002/E070 0003/E078 0001/E820 0020...
Page 889 Chapter 13 3/4/5 color toner cartridge message calling for the bottle. sensor (PS26) The absence of a bottle is wrongly detected in the presence of a bottle. The presence of a bottle is wrongly detected in the absence of a bottle. pre exposure LED image fault (solid black) (LED1)
Page 890 Chapter 13 [3]ITB harness (FM2 0949) connector: J261L/J267L patch image read sensor E020 **81 shutter solenoid (SL11) E020 **90 E020 **91 A sensor error value is detected patch image read sensor E020 **81 (PS2) E020 **90 E020 **91 A sensor error value is detected 1/2/3 ITB HP sensor B (PS30) E070 00** The sensor fails to operate.
Page 891 Chapter 13 F-13-8 F-13-9 Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact. 13-19...
Page 892 13.3.2.2 Light Image / Weak Density 13.3.2.2.1 Overall light image on black area, uneven image 0006-2424 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred for the following reasons: The black developing ass'y was not supplied with toner because the 3P connector of the toner level sensor inside the black developing ass'y was not securely fitted.
Page 893 Chapter 13 13.3.2.2.2 Low density / Poor contact of connectors around process unit 0005-9762 For details of error codes, see the following: E020 0080/E020 0180/E020 0280/E020 0380/E020 0090/E020 0190/E020 0290/E020 0091/E020 0191/E020 0291/E020 0092/E020 0192/E020 0292/E020 0392/E020 00A0/E020 01A0/E020 02A0/E020 03A0/E020 00A1/ E020 01A1/E020 02A1/E020 03A1/E020 00A2/E020 01A2/E020 02A2/E020 03A2/E020 00A3/E020 01A3/ E020 02A3/E020 03A3/E021 0001/E021 0002/E061 0005/E061 0007/E070 0000/E070 0001/E070 0002/E070 0003/E078 0001/E820 0020...
Page 894 Chapter 13 8/9/10/11 color toner level sensor message calling for replacement of toner (PS25) The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner. image fault (low density) E020 **92 The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of toner.
Page 895 Chapter 13 1/2/3 ITB HP sensor B (PS30) E070 00** The sensor fails to operate. 4/5/6 ITB sensor A (PS1) E070 00** The sensor fails to operate. [4]Hopper harness (FM2 0950) connector: J301L hopper stirring motor black developing assembly without toner > image (M23) fault (low density) The motor stops.
Page 896 Chapter 13 F-13-11 F-13-12 Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact. 13-24...
Page 897: Uneven Density
Chapter 13 13.3.2.3 Uneven Density 13.3.2.3.1 Uneven Density Along the Leading Edge in a Solid Color Image 0006-0349 Cause In a H/H environment, toner tends to become moist and have less bonding with carrier, at times sticking directly to the developing cylinder. As a result, the ratio of toner to carrier will increase, causing the leading edge of the image to become darker because of the extra toner from the developing cylinder (as when a solid color image is produced).
Page 898 Chapter 13 Image Sample F-13-13 13-26...
Page 899 Chapter 13 13.3.2.3.2 Uneven Density in the Form of a Feedscrew in Color Images 0005-5640 Cause The developing assembly lid is not fitted correctly when a color toner is replaced. Field Remedy Take out the color developing assembly in question from the machine, and fit its lid so that there is no gap. Be sure to force the lid against the developing assembly so that there is no gap in the area [1] indicated in the diagram, i.e., not permitting insertion of a transparency.
Page 900 Chapter 13 Image Sample F-13-15 13-28...
Page 901 Chapter 13 13.3.2.3.3 Uneven Density in Halftone Images 0005-7963 Description In a high temperature/humidity environment, the symptom can start to occur relatively early (around 100,000 images) after replacement of the primary charging wire/cleaning pad. The uneven density tends to be conspicuous in color half tone images. The uneven density tends to be found at the same area in all colors.
Page 902 Chapter 13 13.3.2.3.4 Colored Dots 0005-8491 Cause When the 2nd and subsequent colors are developed in an M mono halftone area of full color printing, carrier can stick to the drum. The presence of such carrier causes electrical discharge during primary transfer in the 2nd and subsequent colors, causing the polarity of the M toner on the intermediate transfer belt to reverse.
Page 903 Chapter 13 13.3.2.3.5 Uneven Density On Rough Textured Paper 0005-8571 Cause When a Bk solid image is copied on rough textured paper (not of a recommended type), the ups and downs on the surface of the paper can cause a shortage of transfer current, causing white spots and uneven density in images. Field Remedy Execute the following service mode to decrease the pre transfer charging bias: COPIER>ADJUST>HV TR>PRE TR;...
Page 904 Chapter 13 13.3.2.3.6 Coarse Image in a Solid C Original 0006-1405 Cause When a solid C original is used, the machine will faithfully reproduce any uneven surface of the original communicated by its reader unit. Moreover, the machine's controller possesses characteristics that tend to amplify a minute difference in an area of high density, causing any change in an area of a solid C original to be amplified and its print to show a coarse image.
Page 905 Chapter 13 Field Remedy If this symptom is noted, go through the following flow of work to correct it: Start Execute auto gradation correction (full) in user mode. *1 Is the yellow area of the output image coarse? Perform step 1. Execute auto gradation correction (full) in user mode.
Page 906 Chapter 13 <Step 2> 1) Set " 3" or " 4" to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ C. <Step 3> 1) Set " 1" or " 2" to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ C. Description This symptom does not occur while the printer unit is used on its own. This symptom tends to be most conspicuous when a C mono color image is copied.
Page 907 Chapter 13 13.3.2.4 Out of Focus 13.3.2.4.1 Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction 0005-5828 Cause 1.the shock occurring when the ITB cleaning blade goes on or off causes the transfer to the ITB to be displaced. 2.the shock occurring when the secondary transfer outside roller goes on or off causes the transfer to the ITB to be displaced.
Page 908 Chapter 13 Y M C Bk Full Y M C Bk Full Ref. Ref. F-13-22 An increase of '1' made to the setting will move the write start position of the selected color by a single pixel (about 0.04 mm). If you have initialized the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced the DC controller PCB, be sure to enter the values indicated on the service label range of adjustment: 10 to +10 (unit: pixel;...
Page 909 Chapter 13 Filed Remedy (cause 2) 1) Replace the primary transfer roller. 2) Dry wipe the rollers [1] and the scraper [2] shown in the following figure with lint free paper. F-13-23 Memo: When the primary transfer roller becomes worn, shavings from its surface will likely move on the intermediate transfer belt to reach all rollers inside the intermediate transfer unit.
Page 910 Chapter 13 Description This symptom can also be caused by combined factors; in other words, the resistance of the intermediate transfer belt and the amount of deposited toner may well be within allowance individually, they can trigger the symptom when combined.
Page 911 Chapter 13 13.3.2.5 Partially Blank/Streaked 13.3.2.5.1 Vertical Lies in Halftone Images 0005-4285 Description This fault tends to occur in halftone images. Cause The scoop up sheet of the photosensitive drum cleaner bends over at time of replacement, scraping the surface of the photosensitive drum in the form of lines.
Page 912 Chapter 13 Checks to Make After Fitting the Photosensitive Drum Scoop Up Sheet 1. After mounting the photosensitive drum, check to make sure that the scoop up sheet is not warping or bent from below. 2. If wrapped or bent, the scoop up sheet of the photosensitive drum is likely to lead to deformation. The photosensitive drum must always be rotated in counterclockwise direction only, NEVER in clockwise direction.
Page 913 Chapter 13 13.3.2.5.3 Missing Color 0005-5813 Cause When a double sided print is made in a low humidity environment, the secondary transfer voltage tends to increase while processing the 2nd side, at times causing missing color because of an increase in the degree of discharge. F-13-27 13-41...
Page 914 Chapter 13 Field Remedy If this symptom is noted, go through the following flow of work to correct it: START Perform step 1. Using the CA-1 Test Sheet, execute auto duplexing copying. Is the fault*1 found on the 2nd side of the print? Execute auto gradation correction (full) in user mode.
Page 915 Chapter 13 *1: It shows on prints as seen on the following image fault sample: F-13-29 <Step 1> Decrease the secondary transfer voltage for paper type, environment, and color mode using the following 6 service mode items: 1. Environment (TR ENV1) Set the environment in the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV TR>TR ENV1.
Page 916 Chapter 13 5. Secondary Transfer ATVC Target Current Offset (2TR TGT1) Set '0' and execute the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV TR>2TR TGT1. (range of setting: 10 to +10; in 5 yA) 6. Secondary Transfer ATVC Paper Voltage Offset (2TR SHR1) Set ' 3' and execute the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV TR>2TR SHR1.
Page 917 Chapter 13 13.3.2.5.4 White Spots at 51mm Intervals 0005-6903 Cause White spots can occur when wear starts on the primary transfer roller (i.e., an area of the roller is likely to become soft). Field Remedy 1. Replace the primary transfer roller. 2.
Page 918 Chapter 13 Image Sample F-13-31 13.3.2.5.5 Vertical Lines Caused by an ITB Cleaning Fault 0006-4283 Cause When the ITB cleaning blade becomes worn, a part of it can become appreciably rigid and bend. Once this phenomenon occurs, the cleaning blade tends to fail to remove all residual toner from the belt, permitting some (additive) to remain and stick to the ITB, leading to white spots in images.
Page 919 Chapter 13 Note: In black band sequence, the machine will deposit black toner on the ITB in the form of a black belt and collect the toner using the cleaning blade. Explanation This symptom is noticeable in color prints of halftone images, but is absent in mono color prints. A service mode item is also offered as a remedy against this system.
Page 920 Chapter 13 13.3.2.6 Smudged/Streaked 13.3.2.6.1 Vertical Lines 0005-5802 Cause The presence of dirt on the deflecting mirror inside the laser scanner unit can cause lines in vertical direction. Field Remedy Clean the deflecting mirror as follows: 1) Open the hopper assembly. 2) Hold the mirror cleaning tool [1] as shown, and fit it in the slit [2].
Page 921 Chapter 13 6) Turn the mirror cleaning tool [1] by 90 deg as shown. (step 1) 7) Move the mirror cleaning tool [1] to the front and to the rear as shown to clean the laser mirror. (step 2) Procedure1 Procedure2 F-13-35 Description...
Page 922 Chapter 13 13.3.2.6.2 Soiling of the Left/Right Margin on Double Sided Prints (1st side) 0005-4707 Cause The presence of dirt on the sheet found at the lower rear of the fixing/feed assembly can soil the left/right margin of double side prints (1st side). Field Remedy Clean the sheet found at the lower rear of the fixing/feeding assembly.
Page 923 Chapter 13 13.3.2.6.3 Stray Toner 0005-5806 <Cause> When solid color double sided prints are made in a low humidity environment, the inadequate secondary transfer current for the 2nd side can cause stray toner. <Field Remedy> Limit the amount of color toners by executing the following service mode items: Set 3 to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ Y.
Page 924: Oil Lines In Vertical Direction
Chapter 13 13.3.2.6.4 Oil Lines in Vertical Direction 0005-6054 Cause When paper of the same size is used continuously, the area of the fixing roller coming into contact with the edge of paper tends to wear out, developing a dent. The dent in turn tends to collect oil from the belt, resulting in oil lines when paper of a larger size is used.
Page 925 Chapter 13 The machine executes the following in the course of this cleaning mode item: Stops drum idle rotation and magnet roller, and executes black band sequence. Eecutes full speed rotation of the primary charging suction fan in an H/H environment. Step 1 Clean the photosensitive drum as follows: 1) Draw out the process unit.
Page 926: Horizontal Line Caused By Impact From The Developing Rotary
Chapter 13 Image Sample F-13-42 13.3.2.6.6 Horizontal Line Caused by Impact from the Developing Rotary 0006-0303 Cause When a full color print is made, the vibration from the movement of the developing rotary affects the laser exposure mechanism, at times resulting in a horizontal line in the output. Field Remedy Perform the following to adjust the target contrast potential of individual colors: 1) Generate test prints (COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE=1).
Page 927 Chapter 13 5) Once again, generate test prints (COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE=1), and compare the output against the output generated in step 3), thereby making sure that improvement has been made. Note: Make copies using the CA 1 Test Chart and an appropriate original of the user. If the image contrast has adversely been affected, increase the setting using the foregoing service mode item (range of settings: 31 and 49).
Page 928 Chapter 13 13.3.2.6.7 Soiling in the Form of a Ring 0006-2599 Cause If, for some reason, fine particles (e.g., of oil) make their way inside a color developing assembly, electrical discharge is likely to occur between the metal particles on the surface of the developing cylinder and the photosensitive drum, causing soiling in the form of a ring.
Page 929 Chapter 13 Image Sample F-13-45 13-57...
Page 930: Ghost / Memory
Chapter 13 13.3.2.7 Ghost / Memory 13.3.2.7.1 Ghost Caused by a Bend on the ITB Cleaning Blade 0005-6902 Cause The ITB cleaning blade can bend when used in a high humidity environment, causing a ghost image. Field Remedy Replace the ITB cleaning blade. Description This symptom tends to be conspicuous when an image with a high color ratio is copied.
Page 931: Faulty Color Reproduction
Chapter 13 13.3.2.8 Faulty Color Reproduction 13.3.2.8.1 Faulty Color Reproduction Caused by an Error in Primary Transfer ATVC 0006-1872 Cause If the process unit is left alone for a long time in a high humidity environment, the primary transfer ATVC control mechanism that goes on when the main power is turned on can cause electrical discharge between the primary transfer roller and the primary transfer static eliminator.
Page 932 Chapter 13 Image Sample image of a specific color is too light F-13-47 13-60...
Page 933 Chapter 13 image of a specific color is too dark F-13-48 13-61...
Page 934 Chapter 13 image is too light overall F-13-49 13-62...
Page 935: Wrapping Around The Pressure Roller / Oil Traces / Separation Claw Traces
Chapter 13 13.3.3 Faulty Feeding 13.3.3.1 Wrap 13.3.3.1.1 Wrapping Around the Pressure Roller / Oil Traces / Separation Claw Traces / Wrinkle Traces 0005-6299 Description wrapping around the pressure roller occurs when fixing on the 2nd side of a double sided print is under way difference in color caused by oil along the leading edge of the 1st side of a double sided print (wavy, unevenness in gloss) [1] traces of separation claws along the leading edge of the 1st side of a double sided print (lines opposite the separation...
Page 936 Chapter 13 Not 2: Be sure to return the setting back to its initial value when you have replaced the fixing roller or the pressure roller. (If the user seldom uses heavy paper and is likely to complain each time the roller starts to wear out, the setting need not be changed back to its initial value.
Page 937: Malfunction/Faulty Detection
Chapter 13 13.3.4 Malfunction 13.3.4.1 Malfunction/Faulty Detection 13.3.4.1.1 Fixing Web Displacement / 0A15/020D Jam Code 0005-6084 Cause If you open the front cover in any of the following conditions and turn the fixing jam removal knob, the web will likely become slack and displaced: during last rotation after output ("Printer is warming up..."...
Page 938 Chapter 13 F-13-51 1 Web retaining pad 2 Cam 3 Cleaning web 4 Outside heating roller 5 Fixing roller 13-66...
Page 939: User Warning Message
Chapter 13 13.3.4.2 Noise 13.3.4.2.1 Abnormal Noise from the Rotating Rotary 0005-4270 Cause During assembly work after servicing the machine, the controller box plate [1] is likely to have been screwed toward the rear of the plate of the DC controller box [2], thus imposing pressure on the rotary motor. Field Remedy Correct the location at which the plates are screwed in place.
Page 940 Chapter 13 13.3.4.3.2 Frequent DF Reading Glass Cleaning Message 0004-9000 The following is a list of causes and field remedies associated with the symptom: Cause A. dust or dirt on the reading glass; the reader unit detects dirt to issue the cleaning message, and it does not detect stray dust B.
Page 941: Error Code
Chapter 13 13.3.5 Error Code 13.3.5.1 E013 0001 Error Code: How to clear waste toner full detection 0006-4907 [ Manual related ] Field Remedy After replacing the waste toner case or removing the waste toner from the case, clear the toner counter in service mode as follows: Select [COPIER>...
Page 942 Chapter 13 T-13-9 Name (part No.) Pin No. Connection load Expected error condition (notation) (symptom in response to error) [1]ITB cleaner harness (FM2 0946) connector: J214L 1/2/3/4 ITB cleaner shift motor E078 0001 (M21) The motor stops. 5/6/7 ITB cleaning HP sensor E078 0001 (PS23) The sensor fails to operate...
Page 943 Chapter 13 9 14 ATR sensor (PS4) E020 **A0 E020 **A1 E020 **A2 E020 **A3 An error sensor value is detected 15/16 ATR sensor shutter E020 **A0 solenoid (SL12) E020 **A1 E020 **A2 E020 **A3 A sensor error value is detected. [3]ITB harness (FM2 0949) connector: J261L/J267L patch image read sensor...
Page 944 Chapter 13 F-13-53 F-13-54 Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact. 13-72...
Page 945: E020 03A0/E020 01A2 Error Code
Chapter 13 13.3.5.4 E020 03A0/E020 01A2 Error Code 0005-6300 Description This symptom tends to occur when the connection has been disconnected and then connected a number of times (30 times or more). Cause The pins inside the connector tend to wear out when the connector [1] is disconnected and then connected a number of times (left of the process unit).
Page 946: E070 0102 Error Code
Chapter 13 13.3.5.6 E070 0102 Error Code 0005-7223 Description This symptom can occur when paper is placed in the manual feed tray in a low humidity environment and, as a result, the machine is subjected to static noise. Cause If the harness [1] connected to the DC controller PCB is away from the side plate [2] of the DC controller box, wrong detection (E070 0102) of the ITB home position tends to occur easily because of noise.
Page 947: E070 0101/E070 0102/E070 0201/E070 0202/E070 0302 Error Code
Chapter 13 13.3.5.7 E070 0101/E070 0102/E070 0201/E070 0202/E070 0302 Error Code 0005-4278 Cause If the grounding spring found inside the intermediate transfer assembly becomes deformed, the resulting static noise can cause the ITB home position sensor to malfunction. The grounding spring may have become deformed when a part inside the intermediate transfer assembly was replaced.
Page 948: E542 8001 Error Code
Chapter 13 F-13-59 F-13-60 13.3.5.8 E542 8001 Error Code 0005-4273 Cause If the saddle delivery tray door of the Saddle Finisher R2 is not closed, the No. 2 tray will interfere with the door when it moves up/down, causing an error; particularly, the door fails to close at its rear. Field Remedy Close the saddle delivery tray door [1] (particularly, its rear) firmly.
Page 949 Chapter 13 13.4 Outline of Electrical Components 13.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid 13.4.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids 0004-9524 <Reader Unit> The reader unit does not use clutches or solenoids. <Printer Unit> T-13-10 Name Connector No Notation Parts No. PART CHK Fixing/feeding driver PCB DC controller PCB Color developing assembly clutch FK2 0033 CL>1...
Page 950 Chapter 13 Name Connector No Notation Parts No. PART CHK Fixing/feeding driver PCB DC controller PCB Developing rotary locking solenoid SL10 FK2 0117 SL>10 J1106 Patch image read sensor shutter solenoid SL11 FK2 0100 SL>11 J1121 ATR sensor shutter solenoid SL12 FK2 0100 SL>12...
Page 951 Chapter 13 13.4.2 Motor 13.4.2.1 Motors 0004-9333 <Reader Unit> T-13-11 Name Description Notation Parts No. PART CHK E code Scanner motor drives the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base M501 FK2 0237 E202 T-13-12 Connector No. Notation I/F PCB Reader controller PCB M501 J306/307 J203...
Page 952 Chapter 13 <Printer Unit> T-13-13 Name Description Notation Parts No. PART CHK E code Polygon motor drives the laser scanner FM2 0394 (laser scanner MTR>1 E110 assembly) drives the photosensitive drum, photosensitive drum cleaner, Drum/ITB motor intermediate transfer unit FK2 0019 MTR>2 E012 Developing motor...
Page 953 Chapter 13 Name Description Notation Parts No. PART CHK E code Right deck pickup motor Dives the right deck pickup assembly, vertical path roller 2 FL2 0582 MTR>17 Left deck pickup motor drives the left deck pickup assembly FL2 0581 MTR>18 Cassette pickup motor drives the cassette 3/4 pickup assembly...
Page 954 Chapter 13 T-13-14 Connector No. Notation Fixing/feeding Pickup driver PCB DC controller PCB assembly driver PCB J1104 J1109 J1109 J1118 J1127 J1122 J1311/1302 J1119 J1122 J1310/1302 J1119 J1312/1302 J1119 J1310/1302 J1119 J1311/1302 J1119 J1405/1402 J1115 J1406/1402 J1115 J1405/1402 J1115 J1407/1402 J1115 J1406/1402 J1115...
Page 955 Chapter 13 F-13-64 13-83...
Page 956 Chapter 13 13.4.3 Fan 13.4.3.1 Fans 0005-0020 <Reader Unit> T-13-15 Name Function Notation Parts No. PART CHK E code FM13 Reader cooling fan cools the reader assembly FH5 1061 T-13-16 Connector No. Notation Interface PCB Reader controller PCB FM13 J313/J308 J202 FM13 F-13-65...
Page 957 Chapter 13 <Printer Unit> T-13-17 Name Description Notation Parts No. PART CHK E alarm code primary charging suction fan draws air from outside the machine to the primary charging assembly FK2 0103 FAN ON>1 E824 000 Primary charging assembly exhaust fan discharges air from around the primary charging assembly FK2 0124 FAN ON>2...
Page 958 Chapter 13 Connector No. Notation Fixing/feeding driver PCB DC power supply relay PCB DC controller PCB Main controller PCB (main) J1305 J1119 J1110 J1308 J1119 J1108 J1113 J124 FM10 J1110 FM11 J1308 J1119 FM12 J1308 J1119 FM10 FM12 FM11 F-13-66 13-86...
Page 959: Sensor
Chapter 13 13.4.4 Sensor 13.4.4.1 Sensors 0005-0022 <Reader Unit> T-13-19 Name Description Notation Connector No. Parts No. Jam/E code Interface PCB Reader controller PCB PS501 Scanner HP sensor detects scanner home position FK2 0149 J310/J308 J202 PS502 ADF open/closed sensor 1 detects the state (open/closed) of the ADF FK2 0149 J310/J307...
Page 960 Chapter 13 <Printer Unit> T-13-20 Name Description Notation Connector No. Parts No. Jam/E code Feed driver PCB DC controller PCB ITB HP sensor A detects the ITB home position FK2 0161 P004 10 1:HP J1121 E070 Patch image read sensor checks the density of the toner on the ITB FH7 7601 J1121...
Page 961 Chapter 13 Name Description Notation Connector No. Parts No. Jam/E code Feed driver PCB DC controller PCB PS17 Duplexing left sensor detects duplexing left paper FK2 0149 J1307/J1303 J1119 xx11 PS18 Duplexing confluence sensor detects duplexing confluence paper FK2 0149 J1307/J1303 J1119 xx12...
Page 962 Chapter 13 Name Description Notation Connector No. Parts No. Jam/E code Feed driver PCB DC controller PCB PS34 Right deck limit sensor detects the right deck limit FK2 0149 P005 9 1:limit state J1113 PS35 Right deck paper sensor detects the presence/absence of paper in the right deck FK2 0149 P005 8 1:paper present J1113...
Page 963 Chapter 13 Name Description Notation Connector No. Parts No. Jam/E code Feed driver PCB DC controller PCB PS49 Cassette 3 limit sensor detects the cassette 3 limit FK2 0149 P005 1 1:limit state J1114 PS50 Cassette 3 paper sensor detects paper in the cassette 3 FK2 0149 P005 0 1:paper present J1114...
Page 964 Chapter 13 Name Description Notation Connector No. Parts No. Jam/E code Feed driver PCB DC controller PCB PS64 Lower right cover open/closed sensor detects the state (pen/closed) of the lower right cover FK2 0149 P002 1 0:open J1112 PS65 Drum HP sensor detects the home position of the photosensitive drum FK2 0149 J1109...
Page 965 Chapter 13 PS31 PS20 PS26 PS21 PS13 PS64 PS36 PS34 PS33 PS35 PS66 PS60 PS24 PS61 PS51 PS49 PS17 PS62 PS48 PS50 PS57 PS55 PS56 PS54 PS63 F-13-69 13-93...
Page 966 Chapter 13 PS65 PS37 PS39 PS38 PS46 PS44 PS52 PS45 PS53 PS58 PS59 F-13-70 13-94...
Page 967: Switch
Chapter 13 13.4.5 Switch 13.4.5.1 Switches 0005-0068 <Reader Unit> The reader unit does not have any switch. <Printer Unit> T-13-21 Name Description Notation Parts No. COPIER>FUNCTION Connector E code Main power switch turns on/off the main power FK2 0140 Environment switch turns on/off the drum heater, reader heater, cassette heater, deck heater FM2 0844 Cassette heater switch...
Page 968 Chapter 13 SW14 SW15 SW13 SW11 SW12 F-13-71 13-96...
Page 969 Chapter 13 13.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others 13.4.6.1 Heaters, Lamps, and Others 0004-3243 LED1 H501 H502 HDD1 ELB1 F-13-72 13-97...
Page 970 Chapter 13 T-13-22 Name Description Notation Parts No. PART CHK E code Fixing main heater main heater (controls the fixing roller temperature) FK2 0043(100V) E000,E001,E004 FK2 0048(120V) FK2 0053(230V) Fixing sub heater sub heater (controls the fixing roller temperature) FK2 0044(100V) E000,E001,E004 FK2 0049(120V) FK2 0054(230V)
Page 971 Chapter 13 Name Description Notation Parts No. PART CHK E code ELCB1 Leakage breaker leakage breaker FK2 0151(100V) FK2 0152(120V) FK2 0150(230V) HDD1 Hard disk holds programs, images WM2 5208 E602,E606 LED1 Pre exposure LED removes residual charges from the photosensitive drum FK2 0005 scanning lamp illuminates originals...
Page 972: Pcb
Chapter 13 13.4.7 PCBs 13.4.7.1 PCB 0004-9428 <Reader Unit> T-13-24 Notation Name Parts No. Description Interface PCB FM2 1102 communicates with the printer unit, ADF Reader controller PCB FM2 1101 controls the reader unit CCD/AP PCB FM2 0617 (CCD unit) performs analog image processing Inverter PCB FK2 0225...
Page 973: Main Controller Pcb (Main)
Chapter 13 Notation Name Parts No. Description Keypad PCB FM2 1250 controls the input information from the keypad Control panel inverter PCB FM2 1251 controls the back light activation of the LCD [10] Control panel CPU PCB FM2 1249 controls the panel [11] HVT3 FM2 0826...
Page 974 Chapter 13 [10] [11] [16] [13] [12] [14] [15] [17] [32] [18] [31] [19] [30] [20] [29] [22] [21] [28] [23] [27] [24] [26] [25] F-13-74 13-102...
Page 975 Chapter 13 13.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by 13.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by 0001-1848 Of the variable resistors (VR), light emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine those needed in the field are discussed.
Page 976 Chapter 13 13.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main) 0005-0094 LED2 LED5 LED2001 F-13-76 T-13-26 Notation Description LED2001 in operation LED2 +3.3 V (all night) being supplied LED5 +3.3 V (non all night) being supplied 13-104...
Page 977 Chapter 13 13.4.8.4 DC Controller PCB 0004-6239 LED1 LED8 LED7 LED3 LED4 VR10 LED2 LED9 LED5 LED6 F-13-77 T-13-27 Notation Description VR1,VR10 for factory LED1 9 in operation 13-105...
Page 978 Chapter 13 13.4.8.5 HV1 PCB 0005-0082 F-13-78 T-13-28 Notation Description for factory 13.4.8.6 HV2 PCB 0005-0085 F-13-79 T-13-29 Notation Description for factory 13-106...
Page 979: Hv3 Pcb
Chapter 13 13.4.8.7 HV3 PCB 0005-0087 F-13-80 T-13-30 Notation Description for factory for factory 13-107...
Page 980 Chapter 13 13-108...
Page 981 Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis...
Page 983 Contents Contents 14.1 Error Code Table ............................14 1 14.1.1 Error Code ............................... 14 1 14.2 Error Codes (SEND) ............................14 4 14.2.1 Self Diagnostic Display .......................... 14 4 14.2.2 List of Error Codes without Messages ....................14 7 14.3 Error Code Details............................14 14 14.3.1 Error Code Description .........................
Page 984 14.3.44 E530 ..............................14 35 14.3.45 E531 ..............................14 36 14.3.46 E532 ..............................14 36 14.3.47 E535 ..............................14 37 14.3.48 E537 ..............................14 37 14.3.49 E540 ..............................14 38 14.3.50 E542 ..............................14 38 14.3.51 E584 ..............................14 39 14.3.52 E590 ..............................
Page 985: Error Code Table
Chapter 14 14.1 Error Code Table 14.1.1 Error Code 0005-0279 The machine is equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism which runs a check on the machine (particularly, on sensor output) at such times as programmed in advance, indicating the nature of any error it may have come across. The following is a compilation of error codes, with descriptions of how they are identified and possible causes.
Page 986 Chapter 14 Code Description E100 the BD is not detected E110 there is an error in the scanner motor E197 there is an error in the communication with the fixing/feed PCB E202 there is a home position error E225 the lamp has blown E227 there is an error in the power supply (24 V) E240...
Page 987 Chapter 14 Code Description E5F6 there is a saddle butting error E5F8 there is an error in the saddle connector E5F9 there is an error in saddle stitching E602 there is a hard disk error E604 there is a shortage of image memory (SDARM) E605 there is an error in the image memory battery E606...
Page 988 Chapter 14 14.2 Error Codes (SEND) 14.2.1 Self Diagnostic Display 0005-6121 T-14-2 Cause Remedy Scanning has stopped because the size of the data for the scanned original exceeds the limit. Scanning may be possible if [Data Cmprssn] is set to [High Ratio], Resolution is lowered, or [Sharpness] is reduced. Scanning was stopped because the data size of the By selecting [High Ratio] for Data Compression scanned original exceeded the maximum data size that...
Page 989 Chapter 14 Cause Remedy You tried to send through NetWare, but the Tree name Enter the Tree name. was not entered. A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e Check that the network cables and connectors are mail message or an I fax.
Page 990 Chapter 14 Cause Remedy Check the Domain Name setting when Login When setting Login Information for the LDAP server Information in Register LDAP Server in System to 'Use (security auth.)', the domain name is incorrect. Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)'.
Page 991: List Of Error Codes Without Messages
Chapter 14 14.2.2 List of Error Codes without Messages 0005-6118 T-14-3 Cause Remedy # 001 Paper or originals are jammed. Remove any jammed paper or originals. # 003 1. Reduce the resolution, and try sending the document again. Communications that take longer than the preset 2.
Page 992 The document could not be sent because there was 2. Erase unwanted documents to make memory available. insufficient memory available. 3. If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. # 701 The specified Department ID does not exist, or the Enter the correct Department ID or password using 0 9 (numeric keys) on password has changed.
Page 993 Chapter 14 Cause Remedy # 706 The Address Book is being imported or exported Wait until the Address Book import/export function from the Remote UI from the Remote UI, or it is being used by another or the other sending component is complete, and try sending again. sending component.
Page 994 Chapter 14 Cause Remedy # 801 A timeout error occurred while the machine was 1. Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. communicating with the SMTP server to send an 2. Check the network status. e mail message or send/receive an I fax. The SMTP server returned an error while trying to 1.
Page 995 Chapter 14 Cause Remedy # 810 Check the POP Server name in E mail/I Fax in Network Settings in A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). error occurred while receiving an I fax. Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Page 996 Chapter 14 Cause Remedy # 829 This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the received.
Page 997 Chapter 14 Cause Remedy # 837 A connection request was received from a host whose connection is restricted by IP Address Check the settings in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings, which can be set in TCP/IP Settings in Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Page 998: Error Code Details
Chapter 14 14.3 Error Code Details 14.3.1 Error Code Description 0004-6666 The machine is equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism which runs a check on the machine (particularly, on sensor output) at such times as programmed in advance, indicating the nature of any error it may have come across. The following is a compilation of error codes, with descriptions of how they are identified and possible causes.
Page 999 Chapter 14 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks 0022 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main does not reach 110 deg C within 180 sec. thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Page 1000 Chapter 14 14.3.3 E001 0004-2995 T-14-5 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E001 The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the following: main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), sub thermistor (THM4, THM5, THM6), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4).
Page 1001 Chapter 14 14.3.5 E003 0004-3018 T-14-7 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E003 After standby, the drop in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4).
Page 1002 Chapter 14 14.3.6 E004 0004-3055 T-14-8 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E004 There is an error in the fixing assembly protection circuit. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) or sub thermistor (TH4, THM5, THM6).
Page 1003 Chapter 14 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks 000C There is an error in the fixing main heater or Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open the contact heater. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Page 1004 Chapter 14 14.3.7 E005 0004-3551 T-14-9 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E005 There is an error in the take up mechanism of the web. 0000 The web of the fixing assembly has been fully taken up. Reset in service mode: After the web sensor has detected an off state, the count COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Page 1005 Chapter 14 14.3.10 E009 0004-3553 T-14-12 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E009 There is an outside heating roller shift error. The outside heating roller shift motor (M22) is faulty. The outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 00FF The outside heating roller remains in Check the outside heating roller shift motor and the...
Page 1006 Chapter 14 14.3.13 E014 0004-3081 T-14-15 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E014 There is a fixing motor error. 0001 After motor start up, a lock state is not Check the fixing motor (fixing assembly); then, turn identified for 1 sec or more. off and then on the main power.
Page 1007 Chapter 14 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks xx91 The result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of the patch during patch Turn off and then on the main detection (analog) is 1008 or higher. power; then, execute the The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit.
Page 1008 Chapter 14 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks xxD0 For INIT control (service mode INISET *) at time of initial setup, the average of the Turn off and then on the main light Sig values is 200 or lower. power; then, execute the The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit.
Page 1009 Chapter 14 14.3.15 E021 0004-3203 T-14-17 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E021 There is an error in the rotation of the developing assembly. 0001 The developing rotary home position is not detected. Turn off and then on the main power. The motor rotates out of sync because of poor torque caused by any of the following: The developing rotary HP sensor is faulty;...
Page 1010 Chapter 14 14.3.18 E032 0005-5699 T-14-20 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E032 The NE connector counter does not operate. 0001 There is an open circuit in the line for Turn off the main power, and check the cable for the count pulse signal.
Page 1011 Chapter 14 14.3.21 E061 0004-3573 T-14-23 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E061 At time of potential control, a specific level of potential is absent. Or, the limiter goes on. 0001 When forming an image, the potential is 10 V or less during initial rotation. Turn off and then on the main power.
Page 1012 Chapter 14 14.3.23 E073 0004-3581 T-14-25 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E073 With the front door closed, the transfer drawer connector or the transfer frame drawer connector is not connected. 0001 The result of detecting the feed unit indicates the Turn off and then on the main power.
Page 1013 Chapter 14 14.3.27 E100 0004-3216 T-14-29 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E100 The BD is not detected. 0001 The BD signal is not detected when the polygon Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB scanner has been driven for a specific period of time. and the 24V system fuse;...
Page 1014 Chapter 14 14.3.29 E197 0005-8240 T-14-31 Code detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E197 There is an error in the communication with the fixing feed PCB. In the course of initializing communication between Turn off the main power, and check the DC 0002 the DC controller and the fixing/feeding unit, as many controller PCB wiring and the 24V system...
Page 1015 Chapter 14 14.3.32 E227 0004-3545 T-14-34 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E227 There is a power supply (24V) error. 0001 At power on, the 24V port is off. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. 0002 At the start of a job, the 24V port is off.
Page 1016 Chapter 14 14.3.35 E351 0005-5701 T-14-37 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E351 There is an error in the main controller PCB (sub). 0000 At start up, there is an error in the Turn off the main power, and replace the main communication between main controller PCB (sub).
Page 1017 Chapter 14 14.3.38 E490 0004-3310 T-14-40 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E490 The DF is of the wrong model. 0001 The installed DF is not of the correct type. Replace the DF with one of an appropriate type. 14.3.39 E500 0005-0304 T-14-41 Code...
Page 1018 Chapter 14 14.3.41 E505 0005-5756 T-14-43 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E505 There is an error in the backup memory of the finisher (finer R1/R2). 0001 Indicates that there is an error in the check sum Turn off the main power, and check the DC control, of the EEPROM on the finisher controller PCB wiring of the finisher PCB, and 24V system fuse;...
Page 1019: E530
Chapter 14 14.3.43 E519 0005-5800 T-14-45 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E519 There is an error in the gear change motor (finisher R1/R2). 8001 The home position sensor does not go 1) Check the gear change home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? off within a specific period of time 2) Check the wiring between the fisher controller PCB and the gear after the gear change motor has...
Page 1020: E531
Chapter 14 14.3.45 E531 0005-5814 T-14-47 Code Detail Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks E531 There is an error in stapling (finisher R1/R2). 0001 The home position sensor does not go off 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller within a specific period of time after the PCB and the stapler.

This manual is also suitable for:

Ir c6800c

Save PDF